Pricing Instructions Page 1 Printed: 04/08/2023

Pricing Instructions

Pricing Section 1: General Instructions

Pricing Section 2: Pricing Schedules

Schedule 1: Software Schedule 2: ImplementationSchedule 3: HardwareSchedule 4: OptionsSchedule 5: Staffing ResourceSchedule 6: Summary

*Note: We reserve the right to exclude certain Application Modules presented in response to this document.

Software Description: Identify Application Module offering by nameVersion / Release:Qty: Number of Modules proposedUnit Price: Price per ModuleExtended Price: Qty multiplied by Unit PriceInitial Setup and Install if not included in Implementation: PriceAnnual Maintenance after Warranty Period: PriceLicensing Qty:Licensing Basis (i.e. per user):Annual License Fee: Price

The proposer must use the pricing format presented in this document (other formats will not be accepted). “TBD” (to be determined) or similar annotations in the cells for pricing estimates are not acceptable. Failure to fully provide pricing information as described in Pricing Schedules 1 through 6 may lead to proposal rejection.

1.1      Price Proposal Form

The Proposer’s price proposal must be completed in the format provided in this document. The Pricing Proposal Supplement includes six (6) schedules; each appears on a separate worksheet:

2.1      RFI Technical Worksheet

2.2      Schedule 1: Software

2.3      Schedule 2: Implementation

Pricing Instructions Page 2 Printed: 04/08/2023

Implementation Service Description:Rate:Unit Of Measure:Resource Count:Extended Pricing:Initial Setup and Install:Annual Fee:

Hardware Description:Model/Type:Qty:Unit Price:Extended Price:Initial setup and Install:Annual Maintenance:Renewable Years:

Software Description: Identify Application Module offering by nameVersion/Release:Qty:Unit Price:Extended Price:Initial Setup and Install if not included in Implementation:Annual Maintenance after Warranty Period:Licensing Qty:Licensing Basis (i.e. per user):Annual License Fee:

Resource Title - Level:Hourly or Daily Rate:Hours or Days Est Project Hours:Resource Count:Price:

2.4      Schedule 3: Hardware

2.5      Schedule 4: Options

2.6     Schedule 5: Staffing

2.7     Schedule 6: Summary

Technology Evaluation Centers Inc.Request for Information City of Eden Prairie ERP

RFI Worksheet Instructions

RFI ExampleHierarchy

1

1.1

1.1.1

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.2

● Only one response per feature/function is permitted. 1.1.1.3

1.1.1.4

1.1.1.5

1.1.1.6

1.1.1.6

1.1.1.6

RFI Rating LegendResponse

SUP

PSUP

PADD

MOD

3RD

CST

FUT

NS

© Technology Evaluation Centers Inc. 2010. This document may only be used for internal purposes. Reproduction and redistribution are strictly prohibited.

Please provide a single answer for each feature/function (white cells) in this RFI worksheet by placing an X in the most appropriate column (see RFI Rating Legend). Your responses should accurately represent the current state of your products or services.

● Responses are required for features/functions only. Do not provide responses for modules, categories, or subcategories (colored cells).

● Features/functions left blank will default to a "not supported" or equivalent zero-value response.

● You may, if you wish, add explanations for your responses in the Rating Comment field.

Caution:

The RFI worksheet must be completed exactly as described in the instructions provided. Apart from providing responses and comments, you should not modify this spreadsheet in any way. Do not remove any cells from the spreadsheet, insert any new cells, rename any of the criteria, or modify a criterion’s Factor ID, Master Model ID, or Hierarchy number. These kinds of modifications will affect City of Eden Prairie's ability to import and interpret your RFI responses.

Failure to fill out the RFI worksheet correctly may negatively affect your product’s scores during client selection projects. This can lead to misrepresentation of your product’s capabilities, disqualification from selection projects, legal problems during the RFP and contract negotiation phases and other difficulties. City of Eden Prairie is not responsible for any difficulties arising from improperly competed RFIs.

RFI Worksheet Instructions

RFI ExampleCriterion SUP PSUP PADD MOD 3RD CST FUT NS

Module 1

Category of Module 1

Subcategory of Category 1

Criterion 1 X

Criterion 2 X

Criterion 3 X

Criterion 4 X

Criterion 5 X

Criterion 6 X

Criterion 7 X

Criterion 8 X

RFI Rating LegendExplanation

Supported as delivered "out-of-the-box." No additional purchases or customizations are required.

Supported through add-on products, offered by partners.

Supported via a third-party solution (not necessarily a partner).

Supported via customization (changes to source code).

Will be supported in a future release.

Not supported.

© Technology Evaluation Centers Inc. 2010. This document may only be used for internal purposes. Reproduction and redistribution are strictly prohibited.

Supported through an integrated partner solution, typically a separate module or product larger in scale than a simple add-on.

Supported via modifications (screen configurations, reports, user interface customizations, etc.) that do not involve changing the source code.

The RFI worksheet must be completed exactly as described in the instructions provided. Apart from providing responses and comments, you should not modify this spreadsheet in any way. Do not remove any cells from the spreadsheet, insert any new cells, rename any of the criteria, or modify a criterion’s Factor ID, Master Model ID, or Hierarchy number. These kinds of modifications will affect City of Eden Prairie's ability to import and interpret your RFI responses.

Failure to fill out the RFI worksheet correctly may negatively affect your product’s scores during client selection projects. This can lead to misrepresentation of your product’s capabilities, disqualification from selection projects, legal problems during the RFP and contract negotiation phases and other difficulties. City of Eden Prairie is not responsible for

Technology Evaluation Centers Inc.Request for InformationCity of Eden Prairie ERP

General Data

Company Name Company Description Company Homepage

Corporate Headquarters Address 2 Address 3 Address 4

Product Name Product Version Number

Product Description Product Homepage

White Paper Case Study

Logo Geographic Region

Name Title

Phone Number E-mail Address

Additional Contacts

Information within the following spreadsheets will be available to the public.

Technology Evaluation Centers Inc.

General Data

Please send up to five white papers or enter their URLs herePlease send up to five case studies or enter their URLs here

Please insert a bitmap graphic of your logo.

Contact responsible for this RFI

Information within the following spreadsheets will be available to the public.

Please provide information on the contact responsible for certifying that this RFI is accurate and complete to the best of the company's knowledge as of the present date.

Technology Evaluation Centers Inc.Request for InformationCity of Eden Prairie ERP

Hierarchy Criterion SUP PSUP PADD

1 Financials

1.1 General Ledger1.1.1 Parameters and Structuring1.1.1.1 Fiscal calendar is defined by the user1.1.1.2 Calendar periods are defined by the user

1.1.1.3

1.1.1.4 Multiple calendars

1.1.1.5 Multi-entity financial reporting1.1.1.6 Twelve or thirteen fiscal months

1.1.1.7 Fiscal quarterly periods can be defined as 4-4-5, 5-4-4 or 4-5-41.1.1.8 Organization of calendar periods determined by the user

1.1.1.9

1.1.1.10 Open any number of fiscal years or calendar periods at the same time

1.1.1.11

1.1.1.12 Sets reporting entity and its organizational characteristics

1.1.1.13

1.1.1.14 Each entity's ledger can have its own calendar and chart of accounts

Calendar can be defined as uneven periods, adjustment periods or to a maximum of 366 periods

Calendar may be organized in a variety of ways, supporting 999 periods in a financial year

Companies with different regional presences may set a default currency for the financial division of each region

Distinguishes A / P transactions (of the same type) from different entities

1.1.1.15

1.1.1.16

1.1.1.17

1.1.1.18 Maintains unit and dollar amount postings in GL and sub-ledgers

1.1.1.19

1.1.1.20

1.1.1.21

1.1.1.22

1.1.1.23

1.1.1.24

1.1.1.25

1.1.1.26

1.1.1.27 Flexible general ledger key with multiple levels

1.1.1.28 Exception reporting with drill down capabilities

Each entity's ledger can have its own accounting periods opened and closed

User may choose between data collection and real time posting modes

Tracks items in the G / L and sub-ledger by quantity and value (in whichever currency is used)

User-defined criteria for system purges for general ledger transactions, journal vouchers and accounts payable data based on the number of years or months of data required to maintain--each purge type has its own unique criteria

Sub-ledgers closed out prior to performing a purge. The closeout process sets all financial account balances in the sub-ledger to zero by posting an equal and offsetting transaction

Specifies a key and rules to have the system automatically purge all records related to the key throughout the system--sub-ledger accounts, sub-ledger transactions, tables, rates

Automatic check to ensure that prior to deleting a financial record, the account balance must have been "closed out" (i.e., nets to zero)

Translation of balance sheet accounts including the ability to have a default rate (spot) that can be overridden on an exception basis (historic), on an account-by-account basis - do not want to set up a rate for every balance sheet account - the override rates will differ ledger to ledger

Automatically inserts actual account balances into the elapsed month's bucket in a future forecast file at the end of each accounting period when the system rolls into the next period

Prevents roll from one accounting period to the next unless the last job run is the financial statements

Audit log required for any changes to table information that may contain rates and information used by the system in any way; log contains before and after, change, date and user identification

1.1.1.29

1.1.1.301.1.1.31 Integration with ADP electronic transmission of payroll data

1.1.1.32

1.1.1.33

1.1.1.34

1.1.1.35 Processes jobs in edit and update mode1.1.1.36 Jobs required to include error and warning messages on reports

1.1.1.37

1.1.1.38

1.1.1.39 Provides posting views at the company, market and title / SKU level

1.1.1.40

1.1.1.41 User-defined field names for tables

1.1.1.421.1.1.43 Archiving of transaction history as well as purge from active files

1.1.2 Chart of Accounts Structure

1.1.2.1

Change cross charge percentages without retroactively changing previously published financial information

Provision for use of standards that can be automatically propagated throughout the system to the various ledgers

Uses the budget forecast information to create automatic postings; accruals for any potential overhead item, for example, bonus, depreciation, professional fees, new product development and marketing expense; supports standard (automatically repeating) postings and entries that are generated each month with reference to amounts maintained in budget fields for the month. The amounts may or may not be the same from month to month

Automatic year-end rolling of balances in sub-ledgers and general ledger control accounts

Automatic linking and posting of control accounts from related sub-ledger accounts

Reports to include a control report that lists pages on which errors and warnings have occurred

User-defined controls to allow specific jobs to update multiple times in a period

Table master functionality--sets parameters in a table, has jobs read the table and creates postings or reports accordingly

Method for verifying keying to ensure only appropriate records updated

Account structures, such as the name and order for each part of the account may be defined online

1.1.2.2

1.1.2.3

1.1.2.4 Common chart of accounts

1.1.2.5 Common chart of accounts for both the ledgers and the sub-ledgers1.1.2.6 Account numbers may be alphanumeric

1.1.2.7 Hides account number or portions of account number during editing

1.1.2.8

1.1.2.9

1.1.2.10 Accounts cannot be created until an initial transaction is posted

1.1.2.11 Creates accounts in accordance with structure of the chart of accounts

1.1.2.12

1.1.2.13 Specifies account types in structure

1.1.2.141.1.2.15 Account balances for the last twenty-four months

1.1.2.161.1.2.17 Predicts the size of a future period's budget for specific accounts

1.1.2.18 Alphanumeric account keys

1.1.2.191.1.2.20 Minimum of 999 cost center entities

1.1.2.21 Fields and segments can be defined in an account structure1.1.2.22 Analysis fields may be defined by users1.1.2.23 Sub-account codes for product lines within the account1.1.2.24 Intercompany accounts may be culled automatically

1.1.2.25 Sub-account numbers

Account numbers may contain upwards of thirty alphanumeric characters

Defaults to required number of alphanumeric characters rather than requiring the maximum allowable

Hides account number or portions of account number while formulating account sequence

Accounts, cost centers and departments are ordered in a logical manner or in numeric sequence

Account description field accepts up to twenty-five alphanumeric characters

The current balance of an account may be determined from within a chart of accounts.

Determines the size of the current period's budget for specific accounts

Statistical accounts, which specify user-defined values and descriptions containing information that is not monetary

1.1.2.26

1.1.2.27

1.1.2.281.1.2.29 Manages structures for all levels of all organizations

1.1.2.301.1.2.31 Multilevel hierarchy roll-ups as defined by the user1.1.2.32 Manage account hierarchies via a GUI interface (drag-and-drop)

1.1.2.33

1.1.2.341.1.2.35 Assigns a particular currency to each account

1.1.2.361.1.2.37 Fiscal year accounting periods are determined by the user

1.1.2.38 Accounting periods may be designated by calendar or fiscal years1.1.2.39 Per-account entry on a monthly basis or annually by cost center1.1.2.40 Budget accounts for current and future year

1.1.2.41

1.1.2.421.1.2.43 Budgets and accounts can be assigned to a department

1.1.2.44 Associates titles and description information with all accounts1.1.2.45 Hides account numbers for reporting

1.1.2.46

1.1.2.471.1.2.48 Validity checks to ensure existence of standard accounts1.1.3 Ledger Development and Management

1.1.3.1 Manages disparate sets of books for each entity

Track multiple organizational divisions such as business areas and profit centers

Tracks multiple entities in instances where each organization has a specific accounting structure

Consolidates multiple entities (unlimited) results including calendars, chart of accounts and currencies

Comprehensive system reorganization facilities including the ability to relate a new chart of accounts to a previous one

Chart of accounts and titles may have multiple entities, which can be consolidated

Data fields using descriptive flexfields may be added without programming

Specifies accounting periods, including monthly, quarterly and year to date

Accounts may be added to the chart of accounts with characteristics replicated for all departments

Departments may be added to the chart of accounts with characteristics replicated for all expense accounts

Maintenance of history for two years (viewing) and five years (reporting)

Standard chart of accounts that can be automatically copied from one ledger to the new ledger. Results in the automatic creation of a standard set of financial statements, for example, balance sheets, income statements and overhead statements

1.1.3.2 Users may manage and update a set of books for each entity's ledger

1.1.3.3 Assigned books use ledger calendar and chart of accounts

1.1.3.4

1.1.3.5

1.1.3.6

1.1.3.7

1.1.3.8

1.1.3.9

1.1.3.101.1.3.11 Runs monthly statements and budgets at the same time

1.1.3.12

1.1.3.13

1.1.3.141.1.4 Enterprise Reporting Structure

1.1.4.1

1.1.4.2 Maps accounts to business entities with different chart of accounts

1.1.4.3

1.1.4.4 Deploys formulae to create report structures

1.1.4.51.1.4.6 Base reporting structures on multilevel departments

A currency base and the reporting year may be determined and set for all books

Divides sub-ledger into smaller components for departments, cost centers, expense categories, projects, etc.

Sequential account numbers are not required in order to subtotal accounts

Maintains SKU-specific shipment, return and bad debt unit and dollar amount data, when GL accumulation of data may be at higher level of aggregation such as when multiple SKUs are consolidated together

Manipulates data within the GL and sub-ledgers according to preset or calculated parameters defining allocation of postings

Calculates and posts expense items in accordance with an established group of allocation models

Runs monthly processing jobs at the same time instead of one at a time

Different exchange rates for month-end processing and budget or reforecast creation

Different overhead / burden rates for month-end processing and budget or reforecast creation

Ability to work online with financial systems while closing jobs are in process

Multiple level entity structures may be designed without hierarchy limitations

Many-to-many relationships may be associated across sources and targets regardless of accounting treatment

Multi-entity roll-up may be defined by structures for reporting geographic area and functional responsibility

1.1.4.7

1.1.4.81.1.4.9 Consolidation reports for detail and summary levels

1.1.4.101.1.4.11 Consolidation source data is automatically removed

1.1.4.12

1.1.4.13

1.1.4.14

1.1.4.15

1.1.5 Journal Entry and Reporting

1.1.5.1

1.1.5.2

1.1.5.3

1.1.5.41.1.5.5 Journal entries may be input directly

1.1.5.61.1.5.7 Journal entries can be input online, with user annotations

1.1.5.81.1.5.9 Automates journal entries which occur in each period1.1.5.10 Journal entries may be statistical (non-financial) or financial

1.1.5.11 Recurring journal entries

1.1.5.121.1.5.13 Multi-entity transactions create intercompany journal entries

1.1.5.14

Reporting structures allow allocation of more than one account to more than one structure

Diverse charts of accounts may be associated with structures that are not tied to defined hierarchies

Hierarchy of departments can be consolidated by levels for summary purposes

Account balances originating from different sources may be consolidated for financial reporting

Financial data consolidated from different entities can be viewed from any number of hierarchical perspectives

Consolidated data views are available for different perspectives such as entities and geographic units

Consolidate a department one way and the following year consolidate another way without changing the prior year's reporting

Automatic A / P entries and maintenance by interfacing with another accounting system

Automatic inventory entries and maintenance interfacing with another accounting system

Automatic cash account entries and maintenance by interfacing with another accounting system

Interface with third party payroll provider for automatic entries and maintenance

Real time journal entries update daily journal file and balances instantly

Automatically numbers standard journal entries in sequence or as predefined (with a manual option)

Creates a journal entry by reversing an existing entry while maintaining an audit trail

Real time comparison of journal entries (individual or batch) for validation and balancing

1.1.5.15 Manually entered journal entries can be modified before posting

1.1.5.16 Batch totals and batch checking

1.1.5.17

1.1.5.181.1.5.19 Sub-ledger journals associated with reference numbers and dates

1.1.5.201.1.5.21 Journal entry date report1.1.5.22 Journal entry description report1.1.5.23 General ledger account numbers report1.1.5.24 Journal entry amount report1.1.5.25 Journal entries report1.1.5.26 Summarized report of journal entries from A / P system

1.1.5.271.1.5.28 Creates reports containing the summaries of inventory entries1.1.5.29 Cash summary entries report1.1.5.30 Authorization required for manipulation of historical data

1.1.5.31 Moves balances from one period to another with appropriate security

1.1.5.32

1.1.5.331.1.5.34 Percentage formulae1.1.5.35 Statistical formulae1.1.5.36 Variance formulae (volume / price mix)1.1.5.37 Restates prior year results with a different exchange rate

1.1.5.38

1.1.5.39

1.1.5.40

1.1.5.41

1.1.5.42

1.1.5.43

Allots entries to cost centers and divisions by means of a G / L validated formula

Spreads a single entry over multiple accounts by using a spread code based on predefined user criteria

Journal report information covers all journal entries and includes identification

Report on fixed asset depreciation capturing a gain or a loss on the asset's sale

Report writer enables the user to design standard monthly reports as well as "one-off' reports

Support numerous and complex formulae and user defined column formatting

Supports cutting and pasting within report writing application and allow for exporting data to spreadsheet files

Capability for point-and-click drill down for AP data, journal entries and other GL input

Translates accounts at different exchange rates--one account could be at the spot foreign exchange rate, another account could be at the historic exchange rate

Creates postings using year-to-date information, automatically reverse the previous month's posting and replace it with the current posting--can be done monthly or quarterly

Creates automatic posting based on predefined calculation and information contained in the general ledger.

Creates or generates reversal postings for transactions generated from a journal entry posted in error

1.1.5.44

1.1.6 Journal Vouchers1.1.6.1 Online journal voucher input with verification of input

1.1.6.2 Interfaces with third party databases to import and export transactions

1.1.6.31.1.6.4 Transaction completion triggers batch report updates

1.1.6.5

1.1.6.6

1.1.6.71.1.6.8 Posts journal entries and events to different books concurrently1.1.6.9 Upon transaction completion, issues batch control totals

1.1.6.10

1.1.6.11

1.1.6.12

1.1.6.13

1.1.6.14

1.1.6.151.1.6.16 Adjusts prior periods

1.1.6.17 Erroneous journal voucher batches may be removed by mass reversal1.1.6.18 Flexible number of periods retained for historical purposes

1.1.6.19 Intercompany eliminations1.1.6.20 Summary or detail postings to the G / L from sub-ledgers1.1.6.21 User-defined or controlled close processing1.1.6.22 More than one open period is allowed1.1.6.23 More than one period can be open simultaneously1.1.6.24 Initiates new year before closing previous year1.1.6.25 Expense accounts are automatically cleared at year-end close

Maintains a minimum of five years sales and expense history for creating management reports

Designates a journal voucher suspense account for the G / L to correct entries

Real time posting enables direct transaction posting and journal saves, provided that there are no errors

Debits and credits have separate columns in the journal voucher entry screen

Adjustable start and end dates for determining debit and credit balances

Recurring journal entries are automatically posted by the G / L for each accounting period

Month-end accruals are reversed, without manual intervention, at the start of the following period

Line item calculation and posting for clearing entries--generates offsetting entries

Start and stop dates for standard journal transactions may be determined by the user

Start and stop dates for recurring journals may be determined by the user

Posts journal vouchers to the current period while prior period remains open

1.1.6.26 Performs period-end closing multiple times, for trial purposes1.1.6.27 Prior to close, multiple period-end closes can be performed1.1.6.28 Adds transactions to a period after it has been closed

1.1.6.29

1.1.6.30 Consolidates transactions (as desired by the user)

1.1.6.31 Continuous transaction numbering with multiple numbering schemes

1.1.6.32 Audit trails are available in detail for both internal and external auditing

1.1.6.331.1.6.34 Posting to both the general ledger and sub-ledger simultaneously1.1.6.35 Uploads PC-created journal vouchers directly in the system

1.1.6.36

1.1.6.37

1.1.6.38

1.1.6.391.1.6.40 Allows entry of any other currency on journal voucher

1.1.6.411.1.7 Controls for Ledgers

1.1.7.1 Ten or eleven check digits may be set and managed per module

1.1.7.2

1.1.7.31.1.7.4 Suspense accounts classified by error code1.1.7.5 Rules validate and ensure consistency of fields and accounts1.1.7.6 Verifies account, sub account and cost center combinations

1.1.7.71.1.8 Online Inquiry Reporting1.1.8.1 Account activity and balances for current period available online1.1.8.2 Account activity and balances for current year available online1.1.8.3 Account balance for previous year available online1.1.8.4 Amount designated for a planned project available online1.1.8.5 Compares actual operation results to the planned budget, online1.1.8.6 Compares current year to previous year or years

Splits general invoice amount into detailed categories for the acquisition of various items

Posts to different accounts in several companies with the same posting source e.g. journal voucher

Automatic inter-company posting when entry being posted to more than one ledger within the system at the same time or using the same source (for example, a journal voucher)

Creation of additional financial postings based on financial data entered by journal entry

Creation of additional financial transactions based on statistical and non-financial data entered by journal voucher

Foreign exchange calculated automatically when posting a journal entry in an underlying currency that is different from the general account to which it is being posted

User-defined calculations and postings for monthly jobs by utilizing tables

Identifies accounts that are inactive and inhibits or prohibits posts to those accounts

Suspense account creation to hold transactions with errors, to be processed and permanently classified at a later date

User-assigned security rules restrict entry and query access to specific entities, accounts or ranges of entities and accounts

1.1.8.7

1.1.8.8 Query on detailed G / L journal information and the original sub-ledger

1.1.8.9

1.2 Fixed Assets1.2.1 Records for Fixed Assets1.2.1.1 Tracks assets by company1.2.1.2 Tracks asset numbers and types1.2.1.3 Descriptions of assets1.2.1.4 Tracks asset tag and serial numbers1.2.1.5 Assets may be tracked by parent / child relationships1.2.1.6 Tracks asset locations

1.2.1.71.2.1.8 Tracks information on leased assets

1.2.1.9 Tracks leased assets and intangible assets1.2.1.10 Tracks non-depreciating assets, such as expensed items or land1.2.1.11 Creates unique asset tag numbers by using tag controls1.2.1.12 Specifies the original PO number and vendor

1.2.1.13

1.2.1.141.2.1.15 Expense account for G / L depreciation

1.2.1.161.2.1.17 Date of asset transfer

1.2.1.18

1.2.1.19 Provides depreciation calculation results for current and future year1.2.1.20 Asset disposition date and value1.2.1.21 Tax basis by disposal value1.2.1.22 Profit / loss by book and tax1.2.1.23 Purges and restores archived data1.2.1.24 Reports against a capital budget

1.2.1.25

Standard account inquiry that drills down to the source of the transaction in real time and extracts data; also includes analyses fields

Online drill down queries include summary and detail specific accounts, journal entry reviews, payable invoices, funds available and variance calculations

Assets can be tracked by asset number, description, type, tag number, location, PO, invoice number or lease

Captures asset data such as A / P reference, date of purchase and cost

Records the tax cost at the time of the acquisition by using a percentage of the asset cost

Tracks the total depreciation (book and tax) of an asset since it has been in service, the current depreciation method being used

Tracks both the book and tax depreciation balance at the date of its transfer

Compares actual additions to the capital budget and calculate variances

1.2.1.26

1.2.1.271.2.2 Asset Transactions1.2.2.1 Online views of fixed assets and transaction records1.2.2.2 Online asset tracking1.2.2.3 Records details on leased property1.2.2.4 Current cost

1.2.2.5 Generates reports using historical, constant and current dollar value

1.2.2.61.2.2.7 Generates reports on all operating lease payments

1.2.2.8 Retirement reversals

1.2.2.9 Records values of asset appraisals1.2.2.10 Construction-in-progress reporting

1.2.2.111.2.2.12 Maintains up-to-date data on depreciation for a group of assets

1.2.2.13

1.2.2.14

1.2.2.15

1.2.2.16

1.2.2.171.2.3 Depreciation of Assets1.2.3.1 Flexible asset depreciation calendars1.2.3.2 Depreciation may be calculated year-to-date or period-by-period1.2.3.3 User defined depreciation rates can be rules-based1.2.3.4 User-defined prorate conventions and retirement conventions1.2.3.5 Standard and user-defined depreciation calculations

1.2.3.6

1.2.3.71.2.3.8 Automatically calculates changes in depreciation at period end1.2.3.9 Adds new depreciation methods

1.2.3.10

Compares approved funds request to a capital budget as well as actual additions to the approved funds request (actuals, approved funds and budget can all be different numbers)

Projects current year's depreciation by cost center as well as adding a future year's capital budget; then projects the future year's depreciation by cost center

Generates reports on all leased assets, their details and payments information

Designates adjustments as amortizations or expenses to cost, depreciation method, production capacity or salvage value

Transfer asset options including fully or partially, current period or retroactively and mass transfer

Multiple asset retirement options based on period, cost, with trade-ins, etc.

Generates transaction reports for period additions; transfers; disposals; and depreciation, by asset type and cost center.

Generates gains and losses transaction reports by asset type and cost center

Generates asset reports on additions, transfers, retirements, adjustments, ledger, property listing and cost and reserve summaries

Straight-line, declining balance, sum of year's digits, units of production and flat rate depreciation methods

Asset information (such as department and type) presented for depreciation methods

Depreciation methods: straight line, declining balance, sum-of-the-years digits

1.2.3.11 Depreciation methods1.2.3.12 User can convert an accelerated straight line depreciation method1.2.3.13 Generates depreciation projections

1.2.3.141.2.3.15 Creates what-if scenarios to project depreciation1.2.3.16 Depreciation method change reports1.2.4 Depreciation Books

1.2.4.11.2.4.2 Flexible parameters for depreciation books1.2.4.3 Any number of assets can be listed in depreciation books

1.2.4.4

1.2.4.5

1.2.4.6 Enters and tracks expensed items for property control1.2.4.7 Automatic end-of-period updates to G / L1.2.4.8 Updates fixed assets from an A / P entry

1.2.4.9

1.2.4.101.2.4.11 Generates exception reports for F / A and A / P reconciliation1.2.5 Tax Reports1.2.5.1 Adds assets and copies transactions to tax depreciation books1.2.5.2 Associates tax data with individual assets

1.2.5.31.2.5.4 Default depreciation rules based on initial service date for asset1.2.5.5 Examine depreciation costs and expense ceilings

1.2.5.6

1.2.5.7 Automatically calculates tax adjustments when an asset is disposed

1.2.5.81.2.5.9 Short tax year accounting

1.2.5.10 Deferred depreciation

1.2.5.11 ACE reporting

Uses prorate conventions, including half year, actual months, months after, modified half year and full year, for the first year of an asset's life

Conducts asset transactions and reconciliations among multiple companies and divisions

Any number of fiscal periods or calendars can be listed in depreciation books

Reports transfers between company and divisions in individual reports and consolidated reports

Balances a manually entered fixed asset entry with the entry in the A / P records

Updates F / A records automatically whenever a transfer or disposal is entered into journal

Tax depreciation reserve for current and past fiscal years maintained with depreciation expense changes

Calculates the gain and loss of a disposed asset for book and tax purposes

Assigns and calculates investment tax credit rates and a basis reduction rate for an asset in the tax books

1.2.5.12 Generates forms required for IRS reports1.2.5.13 Group or composite tax depreciation accounting

1.2.5.141.2.5.15 Assessment of gains and losses for property disposition

1.3 Accounts Payable1.3.1 Policies and Procedures1.3.1.1 Multiple companies, divisions and cost centers

1.3.1.2

1.3.1.31.3.1.4 Company, division or cost center accounts

1.3.1.51.3.1.6 Approved vendor list for all business entities1.3.1.7 Vendor restrictions according to business entity

1.3.1.8 Uses accrual basis accounting1.3.1.9 Fields for data input may be determined by the user1.3.1.10 Alternate methods of data entry such as scanning and light pens1.3.1.11 EFT1.3.1.12 Multiple banks and accounts1.3.2 Supplier Master Data1.3.2.1 Creates separate records for vendors not used on a regular basis1.3.2.2 Postal code field (including US zip code format)1.3.2.3 Vendor name1.3.2.4 Vendor number1.3.2.5 Vendor type1.3.2.6 Vendor address1.3.2.7 Vendor currency1.3.2.8 Vendor insurance numbers / EIN

Uses municipal and state / province / territory codes when reporting property tax

Data associated with business units according to organizational hierarchy

Different business segment views for supplier and payables information

Sets up A / R system with distinct processing cycles for each company or account code

1.3.2.9 Vendor history with most current invoices listed first1.3.2.10 Contact name of supplier1.3.2.11 Suppliers listed alphabetically by supplier name1.3.2.12 Suppliers listed by supplier code1.3.2.13 Suppliers listed by postal code1.3.2.14 Contact number

1.3.2.15 Standard terms and the ability to mass change1.3.2.16 Default currency by supplier1.3.2.17 Voucher ID (in sequence)1.3.2.18 PO number1.3.2.19 Issue date of voucher

1.3.2.201.3.2.21 Discount percent available based on supplier criteria1.3.2.22 Value of discounts used1.3.2.23 Monetary amount of discounts for acquisitions within a time frame

1.3.2.24 Records date payment must be received for a discount to be effective1.3.2.25 G / L account to be charged and the monetary amount1.3.2.26 Tracks check number, date of issue and amount

1.3.2.27

1.3.2.28

1.3.2.291.3.2.30 Suppliers with multiple locations, addresses and currencies1.3.2.31 Default account assignation by supplier

1.3.2.32 Data entry screens for high-volume activity are supplier-specific1.3.2.33 Manages foreign currency hedge contracts1.3.3 Invoice Process and Aging

1.3.3.1

1.3.3.21.3.3.3 Option to pay invoices immediately

1.3.3.41.3.3.5 No new vendors added at invoice entry (security)1.3.3.6 A / P aging report on outstanding items1.3.3.7 A / P due-date aging1.3.3.8 A / P invoice date aging1.3.3.9 A / P class code aging1.3.3.10 Inserts invoices for future periods

Supplier's invoice or credit number for reference, including amount and date

Manages miscellaneous supplier data such as insurance numbers, addresses, telephone numbers, etc.

Tracks taxes associated with each supplier as well as item discounts calculated before tax

Identifies supplier by type (including freelance, employees, one-time, US tax W2 or 1099 info, etc.)

Creates miscellaneous distribution lines to record charges and invoices for items that do not have POs

Validates vendor invoice numbers, with only valid invoices posted to the accounts payable ledger being scheduled for payment

An invoice that was entered in the system as a system check can be redesignated as a manual check

1.3.3.111.3.3.12 "On hold" designation may be attributed to invoices in system1.3.3.13 Allocates cost to projects

1.3.3.14 A / P system performs maintenance of all invoice information fields1.3.3.15 Currency and exchange rate defaults by vendor

1.3.3.16 Paperless matching--match and pay without invoice

1.3.3.171.3.3.18 Scanned invoice images available online

1.3.3.19

1.3.3.201.3.3.21 Recognizes credit notes or cost adjustments made by user

1.3.3.22

1.3.3.23

1.3.3.24

1.3.3.25

1.3.3.26

1.3.3.271.3.3.28 Flags outstanding items

1.3.3.29

1.3.3.301.3.3.31 Invoice batch edits for checking data input prior to update

1.3.3.32

1.3.3.33 Edits exist to ensure that sales and use tax is entered into the system

1.3.3.34 Overrides sales and use tax at vendor level

Distributes invoices to different accounts within separate companies or locations

Increases or accumulates, over time, vouchers and receivers that are not invoiced or are not recorded as a transaction

Scans accounts payable invoices into system with option to drill down to view invoice

Flexible invoice processing (e.g. one check from multiple invoices or multiple checks from a single invoice)

Links cost adjustment back to original invoice and ensures adjustment is tied to check or payment of the original invoice

Handles a batch filing system--each invoice requires a cross reference number in the system as well as a vendor code

Maintains at least four years of invoice details (current year and three prior years)

Suspends, puts on hold for an individual vendor, individual invoice and individual line

Audit report for any changes to the vendor master file--should show the information before the change, indicate what was changed, who changed it and what the new information is

Sends or routes invoices to various departments for approval and on request produces a report by department that ages the invoices either by invoice date or date sent to department (i.e., tracks the status of a document and to whom it has been sent)

Two-way invoicing or PO options by invoice, PO--on hold until received

Three-way invoicing or PO options by invoice, PO and receiving document match

Invoice inquiry supports search by dollar amount, invoice number, vendor number, vendor name or alpha key

1.3.3.35 Currency and exchange rate overrides by invoice1.3.4 Journal Invoice Process1.3.4.1 Prepays vouchers or makes payment with manual checks

1.3.4.2

1.3.4.31.3.4.4 Multiple vouchers for a receiver or creditor1.3.4.5 Uses classification codes to group transactions

1.3.4.6

1.3.4.7

1.3.4.81.3.4.9 Tracks and maintains vouchers that may not be discounted1.3.4.10 Suspends payment for a voucher and records amount due1.3.4.11 Establishes recurring voucher payments1.3.4.12 Tracks payment- and discount-related information1.3.4.13 Uses vouchers to select which items will be paid

1.3.4.14

1.3.4.15

1.3.4.161.3.4.17 Online view of voucher's dollar value before release1.3.4.18 Debit and credit memos can be specified for an invoice or account1.3.4.19 Automatically accrues vouchers as they are released

1.3.4.20

1.3.4.21 Accrual-basis accounting for recognizing revenue1.3.4.22 Validates account code data online1.3.4.23 Provides report of each transaction by voucher

1.3.4.241.3.4.25 Links invoice number to G / L journal number1.3.4.26 Designates G / L entities on A / P transactions

1.3.4.271.3.4.28 Voucher aging by voucher dates or effectivity dates

1.3.4.29

Online entry and processing of vouchers, with views for purchase order information, receiving document information and credit memo information

Three-way matching for invoice, order and receipt information (automatic and accommodates tolerances)

Multiple vendor sites can be used on a voucher, including different addresses for shipping and remitting

Calculates purchase price variance by comparing the purchase price per item against standard cost

Books and reports purchase price variance in instances of discrepancy between projected and actual costs

Releases all invoices in a date range as indicated by the voucher record discount pay date

Pays all invoices on the open item listing or all invoices up to and including a particular voucher number for a vendor or a range of vendors

Periodic expenses, which do not have an invoice or where the invoice covers consecutive periods, can be set up as individual vouchers for each period

Automatically calculates month-end accruals posted to the journal voucher and reverses transactions that are not invoiced

Reports transaction details of accounts payable invoices posted to the G / L account

Automatically creates an intercompany billing report to show transaction details

Sorts open invoices by expected payment date to project cash requirements

1.3.4.30 Calculates discrepancy between discounts and cost of capital

1.3.4.31

1.3.4.321.3.4.33 Multiple open periods--year-end1.3.4.34 Payments can be made from multiple banks

1.3.4.351.3.5 A / P Ledger Posting1.3.5.1 Detail or summary G / L posting review1.3.5.2 Account codes can be overridden or inputted

1.3.5.3

1.3.5.41.3.5.5 G / L distribution report1.3.5.6 Projects total inventory dollars during a user-specified period1.3.5.7 A / P balances at business unit and plant levels1.3.6 Control of Payments

1.3.6.1

1.3.6.2

1.3.6.31.3.6.4 Places holds on all vendor invoices for a given vendor1.3.6.5 Release payment at vendor level, invoice level or line item1.3.6.6 Supports selective payment by vendor type1.3.7 A / P Transactions and Controls1.3.7.1 Online entry for all A / P transactions, including EDI entry1.3.7.2 All A / P transactions updated in real time1.3.7.3 Selected transactions on deferred batch1.3.7.4 Checks online batch total or voucher balances1.3.7.5 Validates vendor invoices to avoid duplication1.3.7.6 Deletes inactive vendor after a user-defined period

1.3.7.71.3.8 Processing of Payments

1.3.8.1

1.3.8.2

1.3.8.31.3.8.4 Cancels or suspends standard vendor terms

Sorts open invoices by expected payment dates when the voucher is processed and corrects discrepancies

Automatically calculates accrued amounts of inventory, materials and equipment liability at month-end

Multiple companies can be aggregated, with one company designated as the paying company

All transactions are posted daily to the A / P ledger and are automatically posted to the G / L

Reports to the G / L account the total value of all transactions that occurred in a specified period

Verification to prevent a vendor with an open PO or unpaid invoice from being deleted

Verification to prevent a vendor active in current year from being deleted

Negative amount can be added to an invoice (negative invoice line) to indicate, for example, trade discounts

Corrects distribution errors online without having to reenter or reverse entries and transactions

Queries online accounts' voucher histories and analyses of payment histories, late payments and cash discounts

All transactions pertaining to a particular vendor are assigned to a user-specified account

Users can specify complex payment discounts for a payment period by using term codes, such as "step down"

1.3.8.5

1.3.8.61.3.8.7 Automatically calculates discounts

1.3.8.8

1.3.8.91.3.8.10 Overrides discount amounts

1.3.8.11 Allocates freight costs at distribution line level to a company or division

1.3.8.12 Allocates sales tax at distribution line level for a company or division1.3.8.13 Posts sales tax to user-specified account1.3.8.14 Sets frequency of recurring payments

1.3.8.151.3.8.16 Recurring payments can be set at irregular intervals1.3.8.17 Payment holds based on the performance of vendors1.3.8.18 Procedure to pay employee trip advances on a per-trip basis1.3.8.19 Accepts invoices without a PO

1.3.8.20 Skeleton voucher containing standard recurring information1.3.8.21 Queries open and closed payables1.3.8.22 Online view of vendors with current unpaid balances1.3.8.23 Processes credit card payments1.3.8.24 EFTs1.3.8.25 Payments may be processed even when an invoice does not exist1.3.8.26 Partial payments1.3.8.27 Prepayments

1.3.8.281.3.8.29 System security based on organizational and legal entity control1.3.8.30 Automatically generates PO number

1.3.8.31

1.3.8.32

1.3.8.331.3.8.34 Alerts users of outstanding action items

1.3.8.351.3.8.36 Clearly identifies legal entity generating the PO document

1.3.8.37

Assigns dates and standard number of days to credit or discount terms

Automatically calculates discounts based on vouchers and terms of credit

Automatically calculates net payment, incorporating discounts and discount dates

Automatically calculates lost discounts resulting from late or unrealized payments

Recurring payments can be set on weekly, monthly, quarterly, annual or semi-annual basis

Archive program or routine identifies and saves all closed payments and receipts that have not been vouchered

Navigates directly to a specific invoice (for example, by double-clicking on listing)

Tracks status of document (invoice and PO) and to whom it has been sent

Provides summary and aged listing of documents or invoices sent to a department (date based on invoice date, date routed and date sent)

Handles electronic transfer of PO information from any operational area

Multiple search criteria, including vendor, invoice number and dollar amount

1.3.8.38 Approves POs online1.3.8.39 EDI of purchase orders and invoices for select vendors

1.3.8.40

1.3.8.41

1.3.8.42

1.3.8.431.3.9 Processing of Checks1.3.9.1 Funds can be drawn from more than one bank1.3.9.2 Checks can be written from more than one bank

1.3.9.3 User-selected check formats include printed check and EFT formats1.3.9.4 Suppliers can opt to receive a single check per invoice

1.3.9.5

1.3.9.61.3.9.7 Reconciles checks and accounts that are manually input

1.3.9.8

1.3.9.91.3.9.10 Prints sequences of checks by ascending dollar amount1.3.9.11 Voids and replaces checks1.3.9.12 Automatically reverses distribution when a check is voided

1.3.9.13

1.3.9.14 Invoices are automatically returned to the system if a check is voided

1.3.9.15

1.3.9.161.3.9.17 Processes cancelled checks

1.3.9.181.3.9.19 Reports all the transactions of a vendor during a specified period1.3.9.20 Verifies that checks were written by approved personnel only1.3.9.21 Check number count before new check run1.3.9.22 Flags checks requiring attachments prior to mailing

1.3.9.23 Prints checks requiring attachments at the beginning of a check run

Web-enabled activity, such as allowing employees to e-mail expense reports for processing

Travel and entertainment reporting as well as verification by employees

Posts invoices to future periods but pays them in the current period instead of holding onto them

Back-end tax reporting for sales and use tax--a list of invoices processed during the month, which indicates the sales and use tax--input tax credit claimed

Users can select criteria such as supplier number, voucher number, due date and discount date, to determine check sequence

Check run can be recovered and initialized if there are printing problems

Prints sequence of checks by supplier number or supplier number within a specific bank

Prints sequence of checks by supplier name or supplier name within a specific bank

Uses void and replacement check numbers when bank activity is reconciled with account activity

Prints employee expense payments using a sequence distinct from vendor payments

Automatically reconciles the bank account with the accounts payable payment history

Creates a report on all issued checks, including manually entered and voided checks

1.3.9.24 Sorts check runs based on dollar amount of checks1.3.9.25 Supports automated check reconciliation from the bank1.3.9.26 Supports the transfer of data of all cashed checks from banks

1.3.9.271.3.9.28 Laser-printed checks1.3.9.29 Multiple banks and currencies1.3.9.30 Monthly check registers by bank

1.3.9.31 Reinstates an invoice or cancels a check (still payable by the system)

1.3.9.32

1.3.9.331.3.9.34 Electronic funds transfers and direct deposit for employees1.3.9.35 Procurement card processing1.3.10 Reporting

1.3.10.1

1.3.10.21.3.10.3 Employee expense reports (month-to-day and year-to-date)1.3.10.4 Expense reports contain summarized lists divided by category1.3.10.5 Creates report of expenses by cost center or division1.3.10.6 Reports on open travel advances and associated data1.3.10.7 Recurring payments schedule1.3.10.8 Reports details of bank transactions and bank balances

1.3.10.9

1.3.10.10 Age trial balance vendor listing1.3.10.11 Shows cash amount necessary to pay outstanding invoices1.3.10.12 Prints items in base currency or in transaction currency

1.3.10.13

1.3.10.14

1.3.10.15 Age trial balances and vendor payment history (YTD)

1.3.10.16 Employee receivables statements1.3.10.17 Travel expense reporting capability1.3.10.18 Monthly check registers

Posts invoices being processed to one accounting period, but posts the check run to another accounting period

Voids an invoice or check (no longer payable by the system); reverses original distributions; and adjusts the outstanding check lists (while leaving a complete audit trail)

Generates a manual check of an invoice already in the system as an open item waiting to be paid by a computer check--inputs a batch that will transfer the invoice from open item to paid status

Reports on payment hold details, including who placed the hold and when; and when the payment is to be released

Employee expense reports include details on meals, transportation, lodging, etc.

Lists information on vendor account balances and specific vendor line items

Creation of ad hoc reports by user (for example vendor payment history report)

Tax reporting for sales and use tax: summary by vendor or invoice of all input tax credits processed in the month by the A / P system

1.3.10.19

1.4 Accounts Receivable1.4.1 On-line Requirements

1.4.1.1

1.4.1.2

1.4.1.3

1.4.1.4

1.4.1.5 Reject or suspend batches not balancing on either item or dollar totals

1.4.1.6

1.4.1.71.4.2 Processing Requirements

1.4.2.1 Allow either open item or balance forward processing of receivables

1.4.2.2

1.4.2.3

1.4.2.41.4.2.5 Inter-company receivables are processed and accounted for

1.4.2.6

1.4.2.7

1.4.2.81.4.2.9 Issuing invoices for percent complete

Automated workflow--A / P automatically updates and sends message to the general accounting group that a transaction has taken place

Accepts manual entry of invoices, cash receipts and adjustments with G / L accounts and effective dates

Accepts debit memo and credit memo transactions as adjustments to the customer accounts

Identifies each transaction via reference number (such as batch number and line number) that is sequentially generated by the system

Invoice, cash receipt or adjustment transactions may be entered in batches

Invoice, cash receipt or adjustment transactions may be directly entered, bypassing batch entry requirements

Selects or generates reports on customer master records through the same screen that is used to select and display customer records

Compute late charges for customers not paying within a defined time period

Provide a purge process that moves accounts receivable master file records to a history file

Consolidate multiple-location customer billings into a single open item, due from one paying location

For reporting purposes accept cash sales as a specially coded receivable and cash receipt

Automatically balances the A / R master file and checks the total file balance against the accounts in the G / L master file

The A / R master file internally balances individual open item A / R records against corresponding account balances in the customer master file, automatically and reports exceptions

1.4.2.10 Allows for backorders and changes1.4.2.11 Manages foreign trade zones1.4.2.12 Consignment invoicing and tracking

1.4.2.13

1.4.2.141.4.3 Data Requirements

1.4.3.11.4.3.2 Maintain a customer table with name data

1.4.3.3

1.4.3.41.4.3.5 Maintain a customer table with payment terms1.4.3.6 Maintain a customer table with active or inactive status data

1.4.3.7

1.4.3.8

1.4.3.9 Code fields are user defined for adjustment by plant tied to G / L1.4.3.10 Accommodates multiple ship-to information for a sold-to1.4.3.11 Tracks the customer, when sold-to is a finance company1.4.3.12 Allow "lease" or "loan" designation with tax adjustments

1.4.3.13 Stores salesperson ID numbers, ISPs and agents1.4.3.14 Groups orders for commission calculation

1.4.3.15

1.4.3.16

1.4.3.171.4.3.18 Identifiers for tax purposes

1.4.3.191.4.4 Reporting Requirements

1.4.4.1

1.4.4.21.4.4.3 Ages the receivables according to user-definable time buckets

Receivables can be sold to a third party and can be identified as non-qualified in user-defined fields

Tracks advance payments and down payments and posts them to A / R when the sale is taken

Provide automated numbering of customers with user-defined sorting and sequencing capabilities

Maintain a customer table with multiple addresses for sold-to, ship-to and bill-to

Maintain a customer table with multiple contacts, including name, location, title, phone and fax data

Maintain a customer table with customer defaults, which differ from standard defaults

Maintain a summarized history of all written-off customers and invoices for five years

Automatically generate commission credits to agents or internal sales people

Ability to allocate customer PO to invoices from several business units and create external consolidated invoices

System security by user ID-limits, cash tolerances and tax override privileges

Tracks new business as well as pending orders confirmed and unconfirmed

Upon request, print a batch listing, showing every item in a particular batch

Produces an A / R journal that lists all activity posted to the A / R master file and sorts report line items by either batch and line number or customer number

1.4.4.4

1.4.4.5

1.4.4.6 Creates A / R aging reports with one line item per customer

1.4.4.7

1.4.4.8

1.4.4.9

1.4.4.10

1.4.4.11

1.4.4.12

1.4.4.13

1.4.4.14

1.4.4.15

1.4.4.16

1.4.4.171.4.5 Interfacing Requirements

1.4.5.1

1.4.5.2

1.4.5.3

1.4.5.4

1.4.5.51.4.5.6 Automatically prepare general ledger journal entries by write-offs

1.4.5.7

1.4.5.8

Ages receivables either according to invoice date or according to due date

A / R aging report shows a line item for each invoice posted to the A / R master file

Balance forward system produces a period end A / R trial balance showing each account's open period balance, all posting activity and closing balance

Print an accounts receivable exception report listing all accounts with credit balances

Provide a customer contact listing, showing name, phone number and other contact information by customer

Creates a management summary or a key indicator report containing a summary of A / R activity, including DSO, bad debt ratio and percent of current accounts

Forecast cash receipts based on the historical payment patterns of customer accounts

Produce a general ledger distribution by plant or business unit whenever journals are forwarded to the general ledger

Print customer statements showing detailed activity and net amount due for the period

Provide a complete listing of the customer master file, which shows each data element in every record

Print dunning letters allowing different sequences to apply to different customers

Print dunning letters using a sequence of different dunning letter texts, each being printed in successive months

Permit printable "customer record only" invoices and retain for history (must be memo-only and not post to G / L)

Receive invoices and debit or credit memo transactions from the invoicing system

Automatically prepare general ledger journal entries by business unit, for cash receipts

Automatically prepare general ledger journal entries by sales, inventory and cost of goods sold activity that occurs in the invoicing system

Automatically prepare general ledger journal entries by all discounts and deductions recognized through the cash receipts process

Automatically prepare general ledger journal entries by allowance for un-collectible accounts

Automatically prepare general ledger journal entries by inter-company accounts receivable and sales

Automatically prepare general ledger journal entries by customer deposits

1.4.5.9

1.4.5.101.4.5.11 Create a single journal that summarizes activity by invoices

1.4.5.121.4.5.13 Create a single journal that summarizes activity by adjustments

1.4.5.14

1.4.5.15

1.4.5.16

1.4.5.171.5 Customer Financial Management1.5.1 Receivables and Collections Management1.5.1.1 Creating business items1.5.1.2 Managing Cash and Non-Cash Security Deposits1.5.1.3 Electronic Bill Presentment and Payment1.5.1.4 Processing Payments1.5.1.5 Clarifying Open Items1.5.1.6 Handling Overdue Items1.5.1.7 Distributing Revenues1.5.1.8 Credit Management1.5.1.9 Dispute Resolution1.5.2 Reconciliation and Closing1.5.2.1 Processing Daily Reconciliation1.5.2.2 Performing Closing Operations

1.6 Treasury / Cash Management

1.6.1 Accommodates Tender1.6.1.1 Cash1.6.1.2 Check1.6.1.3 Credit cards1.6.1.4 Phone payments1.6.1.5 Web payments1.6.1.6 Lockbox1.6.1.7 EFT

1.6.2 Up-to-date cash balance report

Automatically prepare general ledger journal entries by currency gains and losses due to foreign currency invoices

Produce detailed general ledger journals, one for every accounts receivable transaction

Create a single journal that summarizes activity by cash receipts--auto cash transaction type

Create a single journal that summarizes activity by freight transaction type

Create a single journal that summarizes activity by taxes--Vertex Quantum tax program transaction type

Create a single journal that summarizes activity by specific invoice line items

Accepts automated clearing house transactions (EFT) from the invoicing system sent to specific customers in lieu of invoices

1.6.3

1.6.4

1.6.5 Checks committed funds against cash reserves or availability

1.6.6 Updates and maintains pay date schedule1.6.7 Reports cash projections

1.6.8

1.6.9

1.6.10 Records cash payments and receipts via electronic banking functions

1.6.11

1.6.12

1.6.13

1.6.14 Automated notification for wire transfer transactions

1.6.15 Notifies and reports on statement discrepancies

1.6.16 "Miscellaneous" category for charges and deposits

1.6.17 Processes cancelled A / P checks1.6.18 Prints account statements1.6.19 Automatically records bank cash receipts

1.6.20 Daily and monthly online bank reconciliations

1.6.21 Cash flow projections and reporting

Projects cash resources from sales, A / R, field services and miscellaneous cash

Projects cash utilization from purchasing, A / P and miscellaneous cash

Entity, bank, expected date, terms and customer payment history are used to create cash projections

Views of inflows and outflows from cash book by bank, year or statement

Interfaces with banking software to automate wire transfer and ACH payment process

Workflow approval processing for wire transfer, ACH payment and inter-bank transfer payments and allows standard routing based on the type of payment or transfer type

Automatically creates cash voucher based on standard wire instructions

1.6.22 Online interface with lenders

1.6.23 Cash transfer report and JE

1.6.24

1.6.25 Petty cash processing1.6.26 Debt payment scheduling

1.6.271.6.28 Generates an outstanding check list1.6.29 Tracks and monitors returned checks

1.6.30 Checks the status of a check in real-time and online

1.6.31

1.6.32 Flags certain large or unusual payments made to the district or school1.6.33 Creates user-defined screens for cashiers

1.6.34 Creates reports of daily activity by cashiers

1.6.35

1.6.361.6.37 Processes split or mixed tendering transactions

1.6.381.6.39 Accommodates debt scheduling

1.6.40 Recognizes receipt of bond payments without creating a receivable

1.6.411.6.42 Web-enabled to allow for internet sales1.6.43 Accommodates a phone interface which allows bill payment1.6.44 Accommodate letters of credit1.6.45 Tracks payment against debt

1.6.461.6.47 Generates multiple funding source reports

1.6.48 Electronic access to bank statements

Interfaces directly with automated collection systems or specialized accounting systems for cash transaction data

Generates monthly summarized reports on cash receipts and disbursements

Produces reports comparing prior periods receipts, disbursements and other transactions

Produces reports or queries the system for daily, weekly and monthly reports

Accommodates decentralized accounting for cash receipts with centralized reconciliation

Establishes default account distributions for each revenue stream or type

Recognizes or accommodates revenue earned and billed or revenue billed but not earned

Apportions interest according to a user-defined percentage or flat amount, across all funds

1.6.49

1.7 Project Accounting

1.7.1 Project Accounting General Requirements1.7.1.1 Common Functionality1.7.1.1.1 Assigns indirect cost rates to cost codes1.7.1.1.2 Uses a federal government calculation for an overhead rate1.7.1.1.3 Uses different overhead rates for different projects.

1.7.1.1.4

1.7.1.1.5

1.7.1.1.6 Accommodates the automatic update to fixed assets

1.7.1.1.7 Interfaces with other project management software

1.7.1.1.8

1.7.1.1.91.7.1.1.10 Records project activity across multiple departments1.7.1.1.11 Associates work orders with specific projects1.7.1.1.12 Groups projects in a hierarchical structure

1.7.1.1.13

1.7.1.1.14

1.7.1.1.15 Imaging capabilities for external documents1.7.1.2 Project Tracking and Reporting1.7.1.2.1 Project Name1.7.1.2.2 Project ID number1.7.1.2.3 Cost center number1.7.1.2.4 Company1.7.1.2.5 Legal matter number

Accommodates various convenience fees (and treatment of those fees for GL) for different credit card receipts

Creates templates for internal and external reports using project data including (but not limited) to budgeted amounts, original contract amounts, change orders or budget adjustments, actual costs, future commitments

Allows automatic overall project cost updates to CIP in fixed assets ledger

Maintains data across multiple years for as long as a project is open and for a user-defined period after the close of a project or by projects open during a specific calendar or fiscal year

Associates multiple funding sources with projects and tracks how the funding is applied to actual expenditures

Accounts for advance planning or other pre-development costs before establishing a project and transfers the costs to the project once the project is approved

Permits advanced search capabilities within existing projects such as project name, contractor names, vendors, etc.

1.7.1.2.6 Level of detail1.7.1.2.7 Group1.7.1.2.8 Division1.7.1.2.9 Branch1.7.1.2.10 Unit1.7.1.2.11 Signer1.7.1.2.12 Program code1.7.1.2.13 Subsidiary (if recording endowment data in detail)1.7.1.2.14 Object code number1.7.1.2.15 Amount or cost1.7.1.2.16 Monthly cost amount for budget purposes

1.7.1.2.171.7.1.2.18 Accounting classification1.7.1.2.19 Building1.7.1.2.20 Campus1.7.1.2.21 Purpose1.7.1.2.22 Scope1.7.1.2.23 Status, allows 240 character maximum1.7.1.2.24 Category code1.7.1.2.25 Contract number1.7.1.2.26 Purchase order number1.7.1.2.27 PO date1.7.1.2.28 Invoice number1.7.1.2.29 Invoice date1.7.1.2.30 Document ID number1.7.1.2.31 Units

1.7.1.2.321.7.1.2.33 Project Budget -- on a total project basis and by month-to-date1.7.1.2.34 Project manager name or code1.7.1.2.35 Carryover or new1.7.1.2.36 Contract change orders1.7.1.2.37 PM note with an unlimited text field1.7.1.2.38 Contractor or sub-contractor score

1.7.1.2.391.7.1.2.40 Future committed costs (non-PO costs)

1.7.1.2.41 Other user-defined fields

1.7.1.2.42 Current status, including active, inactive and completed

1.7.1.3 Project Logs

User (project manager)-defined fields for sub-cost level data (up to 100)

Project budget is calcuated on a total project basis and by annual periods for multi-year projects

Handle multiple project dates including board approved date, planned start date, actual start date and planned completion date

1.7.1.3.1 Maintains a log for each project with daily notes or special reminders

1.7.1.3.21.7.1.4 Project Reports and Types1.7.1.4.1 Small capital projects1.7.1.4.2 Large capital projects

1.7.1.4.3 User-defined types or classifications1.7.1.5 Project-date Tracking1.7.1.5.1 Board approved date1.7.1.5.2 Planned start date1.7.1.5.3 Actual start date1.7.1.5.4 Planned completion date1.7.1.5.5 Actual completion date1.7.1.5.6 User-specified dates1.7.2 Project and Cost Coding Structure1.7.2.1 Provide for user definition of project or cost code segments1.7.2.2 Permit user definition of the sizes of each segment

1.7.2.3

1.7.2.4

1.7.2.5

1.7.2.6

1.7.2.7

1.7.2.8

1.7.2.9

1.7.2.10 Provide an option to budget or commit project expenditures by periods

1.7.2.111.7.3 Project Creation

1.7.3.1

1.7.3.2

1.7.3.3

Automatic notification of issues or reminders to internal and external parties by e-mail

User-defined number of actual, commitment, budget and statistical accounts for each level of the account structure

Defines summary accounts in a multilevel hierarchy, including features associated with posting accounts

Use the project and cost coding structures for selection required in reporting

Uses date sensitivity in a structure, such as particular roll-up of tasks, which will take effect within a certain period of time

Free-form notes or text comments can be posted at any level of the structure, with optional notes history, notes notification and notes display at summary details

Provide cut, copy and paste of coding structure elements between projects

User-defined sub-project coding can be applied at any level of the regular cost coding structure to provide a unique breakdown of costs, with optional inclusion or exclusion in project reports

Contract reporting is separate from the coding structure and supports rollups by contract of all the related project activities

A project can be created from a default table containing different project templates, which in turn contain definitions and separate coding structures

An existing project structure may be duplicated with no data being transferred

A new project type may be created by creating a new task sequence and assigning a cost code structure

1.7.3.4 Support for multiyear projects1.7.3.5 Permits multiple phase project definitions

1.7.3.61.7.4 Cost Coding Structure Creation or Maintenance

1.7.4.1

1.7.4.2

1.7.4.3

1.7.4.4

1.7.4.51.7.4.6 Uses the same accounting calendars as the general ledger1.7.5 Transaction Processing1.7.5.1 Distribution to unlimited project and cost codes accounts

1.7.5.21.7.5.3 Posting of financial transactions to open periods

1.7.5.4

1.7.5.5

1.7.5.6

1.7.5.7

1.7.5.8 Provide for recording and tracking of contingent liabilities by project

1.7.5.9

1.7.5.101.7.6 Line Item Data Capture

1.7.6.1

1.7.6.2

1.7.6.31.7.6.4 A source or subsidiary accounting system reference field1.7.7 Reporting Format and Tools

Tracks a contract change order from identification, where it is reported as pending; to formal approval, when it is included in the contract and automatically transferred to commitment

Cost codes may be added to the structure without affecting existing projects

Cost codes to general ledger account conversion is maintained in an online table

A cost code may not be deleted if there are any values for that code in existing projects

When deleting a cost code the system either automatically deletes all references to the code from other parts of the system or disallows the deletion

Retains statistical accounts in a manner that allows the statistical amount to be defined as either a balance forward account or as a balance only account

A running total shows the total debits and credits as they are being entered

Posting of budget, commitment or statistical data to any open or future period

Automatic creation of general ledger transactions with appropriate debit or credit offsets

An accounting date or effective date, indicating which cost ledger accounting period is to be posted

E-mail and workflow routing and tracking of unposted transactions and related images for approval

Provide for recording and tracking of preliminary notices by project and contract

Support a posting interface which permits simultaneous updates of the general and cost ledgers when financial transactions are posted to either ledger

A transaction description field of at least sixty characters in the summary or header

Transaction number, transaction type and general reference fields by line

A line item description initially taken from the sixty character description field in the journal header and optionally overridden by operator

1.7.7.1 Original budget1.7.7.2 Authorized funds1.7.7.3 Prior budget1.7.7.4 Current budget1.7.7.5 Commitments1.7.7.6 Pending commitments (change orders in process)1.7.7.7 Actuals1.7.7.8 Estimate-to-complete

1.7.7.9 Retentions

1.7.7.10

1.7.7.11

1.7.7.12

1.7.7.13 Permits inter-project comparisons at the user-defined level of detail

1.7.7.14

1.8 Budgeting1.8.1 Budget Control

1.8.1.1

1.8.1.2 Budget control logic defined by document source or type or by user

1.8.1.31.8.1.4 User-defined period intervals1.8.2 Budget Accounting

1.8.2.1

1.8.2.2

1.8.2.31.8.2.4 Annual, quarterly, monthly or customized budget periods1.8.2.5 Creates financial statements in conjunction with budgets

User can define details for estimate-to-complete by attaching spreadsheets or freeform notes

Supports reporting of posted transactions, un-posted transactions or both

Uses the cost coding structure to allow online drill-downs from summary to detail; drills-through to source transactions and related documents and images, including estimates and supporting detail, contracts and change orders (actual and pending commitments) and invoices (actuals)

Provides an online query tool or direct link to query tool and real-time spreadsheet interface (specifies spreadsheets, i.e. Lotus or Excel)

Budget control logic can be defined at any area of the account structure or for any number of levels

Budget tolerances and budget and field overrides can be defined by user

Establishes mandatory budgets for selected balance sheets, accounts and profit and loss accounts

Income, expense, liability, assets and equity accounts can be used in the budgeting process

Multiple budgets can be created from a single account to create what-if scenarios and for forecasting

1.8.2.6

1.8.2.71.8.3 Budget Development1.8.3.1 Worksheet tools for developing budgets1.8.3.2 Integrated budget tools1.8.3.3 Generates budget using historical budget and actual budget

1.8.3.41.8.3.5 Budget report summaries for executive or management review

1.8.3.6 Uses historical budgets and actuals to create reports predicting trends

1.8.3.7

1.8.3.8 Budgets can be viewed online and interactively

1.8.3.9 Uses historical budgets and actuals to automatically project trends

1.8.3.10 Recalculated projections are automatically updated in an open budget1.8.4 Budgets1.8.4.1 Multiple budgets for current and previous years1.8.4.2 Many versions of the budget can be created for the current year1.8.4.3 Stores multiple budgets of prior year1.8.4.4 Online reports of budgets to actual

1.8.4.5 Compares budget versus actual dollar activity1.8.4.6 Budget versus forecast comparison

1.8.4.71.8.4.8 Creates budgets for same titles or SKU over several months1.8.4.9 Specified titles or SKUs can be bypassed in a budget calculation

1.8.4.10

1.8.4.11

1.8.4.121.8.4.13 Produces reports on standard operating system default1.8.4.14 Produces reports rounded to dollars, hundreds or thousands1.8.4.15 Produces a consolidated corporate budget or re-forecast1.8.4.16 Multiple budgeting cycles for separate lines of business

1.8.4.171.8.4.18 Allocates an amount across accounts

Pro rata distribution of annual budgets over different periods, including quarterly, monthly or other, customized periods

Pro rata distribution of quarterly budgets over monthly accounting periods

Generates a new budget by using data from historical budgets and changes in historical actuals and percentages

Future costs and revenues can be based on different rates, standards, volumes and user-specified factors

Uses multiple tables to calculate and create budget / forecast balances and records

Budget / forecast master files can be edited online to make top-line adjustments

Formatting of budget reports similar to standard financial reports, but uses twelve months of data instead of one

Formatting of roll ups and consolidations similar to standard financial reports, but uses twelve months of data instead of one

Increases or decreases overheads by entering a percentage for specific accounts or for groups of accounts

1.8.4.19

1.8.4.20

1.8.4.21

1.8.4.22

1.8.4.23

1.8.4.24 Minimum of five budget / forecast files, including current forecast

1.8.4.25 Minimum of five budget / forecast files, including next years' budget

1.8.4.26

1.8.4.27

1.8.4.28

1.8.4.29

1.8.4.30

1.8.4.31

1.8.4.32

1.8.4.33 Stores historical data for a minimum of twenty-four months

1.8.4.34

1.8.4.35

1.8.4.36

1.8.4.37

1.8.4.38

Allocates based on percentages, which are based on statistical account balances (such as head count and floor space)

Automatically inserts account balances into the elapsed month's buckets at the end of each accounting period when the system rolls into the next period

Rolls information for the current accounting period into the future forecast bucket prior to the system rolling into the next accounting period

Changes future forecast bucket and rolls future forecast into current forecast

Minimum of five budget and forecast files, including budget (this file never changes)

Reports budget, current forecast and prior year actual using dollar amounts and percentages

Multiple sets of cross charge percent (for current year and forecast and future years)

Changing percentages mid-year does not change numbers retroactively to preserve integrity of numbers that have been previously reported

Automatically recalculates the budget or current forecast at prevailing exchange rate or another user-specified rate

Different companies can have their forecasts rolled separately to comply with their budgeting timetables

User-defined number of buckets allows multiple forecasts and variance analyses

Creates forecasts using different timeframes for different business entities

Reports can compare last year's actuals or budgeted amounts to current year's actuals

Compares current year's budget and actuals against last forecast for previous year, actuals for previous year or last year's budget

Display all twelve months worth of the current year's budget by month, versus the most current forecast at the aggregate and detailed levels and versus the prior year's actual at the aggregate and detailed levels

Users may download the file from the system, create a spreadsheet version of the file for manipulation and editing by other users, then upload the altered file to the system

Maintain budget and forecast comparative data in the GL and sub-ledgers for viewing and reporting on both balance sheet accounts and income statement accounts

1.8.4.39

1.8.4.401.8.4.41 Generates and updates budgets in real time1.8.5 Allocation of Budgets1.8.5.1 Defines budget level financial allocations

1.8.5.21.8.5.3 Budgets are proportionally distributed to other accounts or groups

1.9 Financial Reporting1.9.1 Online Requirements

1.9.1.1

1.9.1.2

1.9.1.3

1.9.1.4

1.9.1.5

1.9.1.61.9.1.7 Column specifications indicate column width

1.9.1.8

1.9.1.9

1.9.1.10

1.9.1.11

1.9.1.12

1.9.1.13

1.9.1.14

Restate the budget, forecast or prior year results at the current foreign exchange rate and quantify what the change is due to the change in foreign exchange rates

Runs actual, budgeted and forecasted statements at the same time, using different exchange rates

Upper-level budgets are distributed among appropriate division-level or detail budgets, by accounting groups, organization units or departments, product lines or projects.

Specifies report rows as a set of accounts defined by an account range

Specifies report rows as a set of accounts defined by a list of account numbers

Specifies report rows as a set of accounts defined by a mask on the account number

Specifies report rows as a set of accounts defined by a department (summary or detail) in a financial report structure

Specifies report rows as a set of accounts defined by account balances that meet specified conditions

Creates report rows using a separate file of row specifications that links particular accounts to individual rows

Column specifications indicate the beginning column position on the report, up to 196 column positions

Column specifications indicate editing options, including currency symbols and commas

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including thousands of dollars

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including specified number of decimals

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including reporting negatives in parentheses

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including where to select column information such as current year actuals

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including where to select prior year actuals

1.9.1.15

1.9.1.16

1.9.1.17

1.9.1.18

1.9.1.19

1.9.1.20

1.9.1.21

1.9.1.22

1.9.2 Miscellaneous

1.9.2.1

1.9.2.2

1.9.2.3

1.9.2.4

1.9.2.5

1.9.2.61.9.2.7 Provide multiple levels of control breaks

1.9.2.8

1.9.2.9

1.9.2.10

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including budget version number

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including where to select column information such as period format by YTD balances

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including where to select column information, such as periods in the current or prior year

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including where to select column information such as forecasted year end amount (actual plus budget)

Column specifications indicate options to edit data, including where to select column information such as quarterly balances

Column titles that span several columns and contain up to four lines of description

Allow particular rows or columns to be defined as the sum or difference of two other rows / columns

Enable an entire new report specification to be set up by copying an old one

Schedule the execution of any custom financial reports so that they can be run at any time or any day of the week

Control break can be defined on any component of a qualified account number, such as by department

Provide control break logic that prints totals being accumulated since the previous control break

Provide control break logic that prints a blank line or set of underlines, before or after printing a total

Provide control break logic that prints the next control value only once to start the next control group

Provide control break logic that prints user-defined headers for each control break

Custom financial report can automatically print an unlimited number of header title lines on each report page

Financial report can be customized to automatically print report routing for data control on each report page

Financial report can be customized to automatically print page numbers, date and time on each report page

1.9.2.11 Allow financial report writer specifications to be printed on hard copy

1.9.2.121.9.3 Report Writing Capabilities1.9.3.1 Transaction and trial balance reports

1.9.3.2 Trial balance1.9.3.3 Report for the profit and loss statement and balance sheet

1.9.3.41.9.3.5 Comparison on different types of income statements1.9.3.6 Balance sheet comparison showing different periods' balances1.9.3.7 Detail and summary level in G / L report

1.9.3.8 Summary and detail levels for trial balances

1.9.3.91.9.3.10 Specific reports may be requested1.9.3.11 User has option of multiple financial statement report formats1.9.3.12 Reports can be exported in a tab- delimited format

1.9.3.13 Produce reports on standard operating system default1.9.3.14 Report on fixed assets

1.9.3.15 Tracks and documents all maintenance transactions for each account

1.9.3.16

1.9.3.17 Lists chart of accounts

1.9.3.18 Reports for entity accounts, sub-accounts, cost centers and projects

1.9.3.19

1.9.3.20

1.9.3.21 Report writing tool is not required to generate a division activity report1.9.3.22 Users may define "as-of" date ranges for reporting

1.9.3.231.9.3.24 Reports profitability by company1.9.3.25 Reports profitability by product line

Reported information can be extracted, placed into a file and loaded into a spreadsheet or other software packages

Budget statement comparison including current state and journal details

Transactions from multiple periods are contained in the balance forward report

Reports on exceptions (defined for process and transaction parameters)

Documents accruals and reversals in an audit trail, based on a user-determined period

Maintains a transaction's cross-reference code from its source through to its final posting on the G / L

Generates reports on account transactions via user-determined data criteria

1.9.3.26 Responsibility reporting for different levels of management

1.9.3.271.9.3.28 Responsibility reporting by entity1.9.3.29 Reports on areas of accountability based on the functional domain1.9.3.30 Reports on areas of accountability based on the product1.9.3.31 Contribution reports by company1.9.3.32 Contribution reports by product line1.9.3.33 Reports the distribution of funds in accounts

1.9.3.34

1.9.3.351.9.3.36 Cross-references user accounts with organizational units1.9.3.37 Exports as tab-delimited spreadsheet format

1.9.3.381.9.3.39 Report writer for the G / L1.9.3.40 Financial reporting format is determined by the user

1.9.3.41

1.9.3.421.9.3.43 User-defined report titles and account distribution information1.9.3.44 User-defined column headings

1.9.3.45 Flexible date line formats within same report, as determind by the user1.9.3.46 Number of print lines on a page and page breaks is user-defined1.9.3.47 Subtotals and separates calculations1.9.3.48 Uses multiple factors in calculations1.9.3.49 User-defined factors for calculations1.9.3.50 Uses multiple constants in calculations1.9.3.51 User-defined column spacing1.9.3.52 Unlimited totaling and subtotaling in reports1.9.3.53 Total line and data line can be formatted differently1.9.3.54 Rounding by report1.9.3.55 Rounding by column

1.9.3.56

1.9.3.57 Reports that have been rounded crossfoot with total lines1.9.3.58 Reports can be created separately by business entity

1.9.3.59

Responsibility reporting by user account, responsibility center or organizational hierarchy

Generates report of account activity and transactions that are posted using the spread method, against budget and variance in a given fiscal year

Generates control reports of all accounting activity within different areas of the company

Generates reports on transactions and entries using account classes, account groups or rolled-up accounts or other user-specified groups

System maintains standard rate data for reporting, allowing multiple options for same report

System maintains standard cost data for reporting, allowing multiple options for same report

User can control the rounding of calculations in system reports and whether calculations take place before or after rounding

Reporting and customizable graphics including pie charts, histograms and bar charts

1.9.3.60 Automatic linking and posting of sub-ledgers to control account

1.9.3.611.9.3.62 Support multi-level consolidation of reporting entities

1.9.3.63

1.9.3.641.9.3.65 Built-in management reporting system with key statistics1.9.3.66 Sequential sorting1.10 Budget Planning1.10.1 The Detailed Budget Notification1.10.1.1 Comparison of calculated and approved expenditures

1.10.1.21.10.1.3 Entering budget codes and to filter according to codes

1.10.1.41.10.1.5 Calculate the capital budget amounts1.10.2 The Cash Budget Notification

1.10.2.1

1.10.2.21.10.3 The Budget Performance Control

1.10.3.1

1.10.3.21.10.3.3 Generate report of budget and performance comparison2 Customer Care and Billing2.1 Customer Care2.1.1 General Requirements2.1.1.1 General2.1.1.1.1 Use of technologies such as OOAD, C / C++ and Java

2.1.1.1.2

2.1.1.1.3

2.1.1.1.4

2.1.1.1.5

Tracks intercompany sales for reporting and tax (transfer pricing) purposes

Exception reporting--the system is capable of identifying a variance and then supporting drill-down to identify the source of the variance--back to an invoice image if required

User reporting tool--including flexible report format, rounding options, calculation options and variance analysis--can access underlying data contained in the general ledger database

Comparison of calculated operationg expenditures distribution and the investment plans amounts cited in the approved budget

Calculating operating budget using the uniform accountancy calculation approach

Calculate the company liquidity shortage portion that is distributed between every capital plan

Calculate the liquidity allocated to the investment plans including the no fulfillment amounts

Adjustment of cash, operating budget using the uniform accountancy calculations approach

Comparison of the notified credits of cash, operating budget using the uniform accountancy calculations approach

Source code, together with system documentation, to enable in-house enhancement and maintenance

Provision of the name, source, type and version of the customer care system or module

Single view of customer activities based on integrating customer data across customer service interfaces, sales and marketing channels and billing systems

Design on a customer-centric model such that the client can focus on understanding and satisfying customer needs

2.1.1.1.6

2.1.1.1.7

2.1.1.1.8

2.1.1.1.9

2.1.1.1.10

2.1.1.1.11

2.1.1.1.12

2.1.1.1.132.1.1.1.14 Web-based GUI

2.1.1.1.152.1.1.1.16 User-definable validation rules for entry fields

2.1.1.1.17

2.1.1.1.18

2.1.1.1.19

2.1.1.1.20

2.1.1.1.21

Hierarchical structure of customers, accounts and services, such that each customer may have one or more than one account and each account may have none, one or more than one service attached to it

Maintenance of a common customer, product and service database for multiple companies or service providers

Detailed description of the system's features and capabilities, covering the functional requirements, supplemented with additional functions that the vendor may wish to include

Flexibility in accommodating new services, service packages, discounts, multilevel customer hierarchies (e.g., account, the customer, subscriber) and others to support the rapid deployment of new services and offerings to new and existing customers

Detailed description of the features and capabilities of the product pertaining to the above requirement

Designation of user departments such as system administration, customer care call center, finance, billing, billing operations, roaming, fraud, credit and collections, etc.

Graphical UI designed to be intuitive and easy-to-use, both in English and in other supported languages

Secure sign-on for all system users. The system administrator can define whether a second password is required for particular facilities

Enforced completion of mandatory fields at all stages of a workflow to enforce data integrity, prior to passing the work order to the next stage

Effective mechanism by which customer and service management can be performed off-line as a secondary means to provide customer care input functions

Workflow tasks that are assignable to specific users, user groups or entire departments

Configurable user defined default values for all recurrent data entry fields

Selection from a drop-down list of the street, town, area, city, county and region in the address fields

Real time recording and amendment of lead information, prospect information and customer information (including methods of ID used to open residential customer accounts where necessary), as well as the generation of relevant documentation that is required for completion by the prospect or the customer (such as a welcome letter or welcome order pack). Conversion of a lead to a prospect and thence to a customer, is without need for re-keying the data. This means that the system has the ability to automatically pass information from a prospective database to the customer database.

2.1.1.1.222.1.1.2 Searches to Eliminate the Creation of Duplicate Records

2.1.1.2.12.1.1.2.2 Search by surname2.1.1.2.3 Search by name2.1.1.2.4 Search by phone number (mobile or fixed)2.1.1.2.5 Search by account number2.1.1.2.6 Search by bill number2.1.1.2.7 Search by invoice reference2.1.1.2.8 Search by fault ID2.1.1.2.9 Search by postal zip code2.1.1.2.10 Search by order number

2.1.1.2.112.1.1.3 CSR Support

2.1.1.3.1

2.1.1.3.2

2.1.1.3.3

2.1.1.3.4

2.1.1.3.5

2.1.1.3.6

2.1.1.3.7

2.1.1.3.8

2.1.1.3.92.1.1.4 Credit Verification and Tracking Methods

2.1.1.4.12.1.1.4.2 Parameter-driven credit thresholds and limits2.1.1.4.3 Credit limit checks performed in a near real time manner2.1.1.5 Supported Payment Methods2.1.1.5.1 Cash2.1.1.5.2 Check

Multiple user-defined layouts that may include outstanding bills, disputed items, number of handsets and payment program installments due or overdue. These layouts are customizable locally without the need to refer back to the system vendor. The user can customize the fields and lead texts of the layouts to suit different CSR categories

Variety of searches on a number of fields to avoid creation of duplicate records for an already existing customer

Use of multiple parameters, driven and validated by the order of entry. Partial matches are allowed as search criteria

Hardware and software (including all types of required user equipment at remote sites) required to set up central and remote CSR terminals at different premises around the country

Location of such terminals decided during the implementation period of the system

Terminals that can be used by subscriber service personnel for requests for new subscriber creation

Terminals that can be used by subscriber service personnel for requests for change of subscriber status or category

Terminals that can be used by subscriber service personnel for requests for provisioning of new services for existing subscribers

Terminals that can be used by subscriber service personnel for inquiry regarding a subscriber's billing information

Terminals that can be used by subscriber service personnel for payment of a subscriber's bills and updating of his account

Terminals that can be used by subscriber service personnel for any request for change of name or address

Terminals that can be used by subscriber service personnel for any other service provisioning activities found to be essential during implementation and later operation of the system

Establish multiple credit limits and control of usage based on business rules

2.1.1.5.3 Lockbox2.1.1.5.4 Credit card over-the-Web2.1.1.6 Core Customer Care Reports2.1.1.6.1 Creation of reports by the user2.1.1.6.2 Availability of tools to create ad-hoc reports

2.1.1.6.3 Dynamic report extraction, i.e., the user chooses the search conditions

2.1.1.6.42.1.1.7 Services

2.1.1.7.1

2.1.1.7.2

2.1.1.7.32.1.1.7.4 Association of services with tariff plans

2.1.1.7.52.1.1.7.6 Activation period for services: days, weeks, months, years

2.1.1.7.7

2.1.1.7.8

2.1.1.7.9

2.1.1.7.10

2.1.1.7.112.1.1.8 Accounts

2.1.1.8.1

2.1.1.8.2

2.1.1.8.3

2.1.1.8.4

2.1.1.8.52.1.1.8.6 Creation, updating and deletion of subscriber accounts

Export reports to external applications (such as Microsoft Excel) where the user defines the format (not a proprietary format)

Application enables a flexible tool to define new products and services, while continuing to support all services and products offered to customers

Determination of if a certain customer has a certain service through checking in the database

Real time interface between the billing system and the CRM system for definitions of services

Ability to create bundles or packages of services and to allocate a new pricing plan for the package

Charges for services: onetime activation fee, recurring or usage-based charges

Selection, activation, deselection and deactivation of any possible combination of the above characteristics by MML commands or by using a GUI-based interface

Provisioning of temporary services and amendments to existing ones with user-configurable interfaces

Customer, account and service management designed such that the ownership of a service can be readily interchanged between different customers

Recording of details of cancellation of service reasons at any stage in the process, by using unique reason codes that are directly related to the respective customer hierarchy level

Grouping of accounts hierarchically, particularly for marketing and billing purposes, as well as for internal reporting

Aggregation and separation of invoices of groups of accounts in order to satisfy most customers' financial reporting requirements

Allocation of passwords to a customer account profile, in order to provide a secure environment for customer requests. The existence of a password for differing levels of service will be distinguishable to the operator upon accessing the account

Identification of mobile subscribers by a unique account code number, which will be used by the CSR to query and update account or subscriber information

Account hierarchy, i.e., parent / child account relationships, no limit to the hierarchy levels

2.1.1.8.7

2.1.1.8.82.1.1.9 Customers

2.1.1.9.1

2.1.1.9.2

2.1.1.9.3

2.1.1.9.4

2.1.1.9.5

2.1.1.9.62.1.1.10 Customer Communication

2.1.1.10.1

2.1.1.10.2

2.1.1.10.3

2.1.1.10.4 Route contacts to a relevant team based on the nature of the contact

2.1.1.10.5

2.1.1.10.6

2.1.1.10.7

2.1.1.10.8

2.1.1.10.9 Changing of the preference for English or other language at any time

2.1.1.10.10

2.1.1.10.11

2.1.1.10.12

Flexible hierarchical customer account structure. Bills may be produce on any level of the hierarchy, per the customer request

Multiple addresses for an individual company or account (e.g., registered, invoice, billing and multiple delivery addresses)

Automatic validation of new customers to check if they have been customers before

Changing of the customer hierarchy, such as the addition or removal of a level in the hierarchy

Checking of the database to determine if a service for a certain customer is active

Provision of information on a customer's status, including whether their account is active, selected for credit control, disconnected, terminated or subject to legal action

Prevention of the creation of a new subscription whose information already exists

Block fields from being modified by CSRs, depending on their authorization and function. Items which are not open for modification, display as disabled

Effective management of inbound and outbound communications via various communication channels

Tracking of open customer inquiries and prioritize inquiries based on inquiry type, customer treatment and inquiry date

Closing of an open customer inquiry after the required information has been provided to the customer

Scripting, in order to streamline and make consistent all external verbal communications

Addition, definition and configuration of new standard letters without the need of vendor support

Allocation of the customer services team and DDI contact, as well as having a single point of contact for dedicated response to key customers

Recording of the customer's preference for English or other language output

Production of all printed output and correspondence for the customer in the chosen language

Mechanisms to automate messages to any media types (e-mail address, mobile number [for SMS contact] or any other media) corresponding to the customer hierarchies

Generation of appropriate types of documentation (in a parameterized manner) upon committing a new prospect or at the conversion of a prospect into a customer

2.1.1.10.132.1.1.10.14 A set of standard letters, such as a welcome letter2.1.1.11 Customer Allocation

2.1.1.11.1

2.1.1.11.2

2.1.1.11.3

2.1.1.11.4

2.1.1.11.5

2.1.1.11.6

2.1.1.11.72.1.1.12 Data Storage2.1.1.12.1 Storage of any customer account discount plans

2.1.1.12.2

2.1.1.12.3

2.1.1.12.4 Storage of customer validation information

2.1.1.12.52.1.1.12.6 Real time availability of historical data

2.1.1.12.7

2.1.1.12.8

Ability for the customer to raise new orders for hardware, accessories or services and support various types of each, a feature that is be provided by or linked to, an inventory system

Allocation of customers by type, such as residential, business, trader, government, staff, etc.

Allocation of customers to subsets, such as doctors, lawyers, teachers and SMEs

Allocation of customers to categories, such as VIP, professional, private, major, etc.

Segmentation of customers into groups such as major account, large business, small business, residential, government, etc.

Classification of customers as being "key", such that they are easily distinguishable to operators who offer user defined methods of managing the account (e.g., whether to exclude from normal credit control process, workflow bypasses, etc.). All customer classification groups (such as market sector, account level or rating) are identified within the tender

Account history inquiries in order to ascertain the customer's monetary value to the user

Prioritize certain service requests or amendments, as defined in a customizable manner within the customer profile

Storage of customer preferences, such as billing frequency, modes of correspondence, mode of bill distribution, bill format, modes of payment, language, etc.

Storage of miscellaneous information such as the client account manager's name, the customer's bank name, bank account number, etc.

Storage of customer history, such as customer interactions, orders, promotions, subscribed products and services, billing and credit history

Tracing of the history of an account or service number, such that the details of all previous customers who had a certain number are accessible

Customer subscription information that is made available to all CC&B modules

2.1.1.12.92.1.1.13 Account History Information2.1.1.13.1 Billing and payment history2.1.1.13.2 Treatment and collections history2.1.1.13.3 Customer contact log2.1.1.13.4 Service inquiries and changes2.1.1.13.5 Post-sale support activity2.1.1.14 Customer Subscription System Information2.1.1.14.1 Customer information2.1.1.14.2 Customer profile

2.1.1.14.32.1.1.14.4 Subscription (billing) address2.1.1.14.5 Subscription (service) address(es)2.1.1.14.6 Province, city, county, state, zip code and additional information2.1.1.14.7 Additional information accommodated in configurable fields2.1.1.15 Customer Subscription Data Management2.1.1.15.1 Service type usage2.1.1.15.2 Telephone number (if applicable)2.1.1.15.3 Line assignment information2.1.1.15.4 Contracts and extensions2.1.1.15.5 Date of entry into service2.1.1.15.6 Subscription fees and conditions2.1.1.15.7 Status2.1.1.15.8 Service termination information2.1.2 Billing System Interface

2.1.2.1

2.1.2.2

2.1.2.3

2.1.2.4

2.1.2.52.1.3 Trouble Ticketing Requirements2.1.3.1 General2.1.3.1.1 Receival of the customer's fault ticket2.1.3.1.2 Generation of a fault ticket based on the report2.1.3.1.3 Dispatch of the fault ticket to the fault management center

Maintainable standard address information, titles, qualifications, analysis groupings, classifications, segmentation codes and customizable flags for inclusion or exclusion for standard and tailored representation of these fields. All database tables or files supporting client maintenance for customers, products and services are identified within the response

Identification includes items such as, social insurance / security number, nationality, birth date and birthplace

Seamless interfacing with the billing system to exchange all necessary data

Provision of the billing system with necessary customer account information, such as subscribed products, services and supplementary services, as well as with details concerning billing options, such as bill format

Interface to request pricing information, usage investigation and adjustment

Interface to request special billing such as billing advice, a bill on demand, split billing or a bill for terminated customers

Interface to provide details concerning special payment options, such as advance payments and deferred payments

2.1.3.1.4 Tracking of the fault ticket until the fault is rectified

2.1.3.1.52.1.3.1.6 Logging of trouble tickets and prioritize and categorize them

2.1.3.1.72.1.3.2 Trouble Ticket Reporting2.1.3.2.1 Receival of fault reports via walk-ins2.1.3.2.2 Receival of fault reports via telephone2.1.3.2.3 Receival of fault reports via fax2.1.3.2.4 Receival of fault reports via e-mail2.1.3.2.5 Reporting of multiple different faults per service2.1.3.2.6 Inability for the same fault to be reported more than once2.1.3.2.7 Assignment of multiple faults per call

2.1.3.2.8

2.1.3.2.9

2.1.3.2.102.1.3.3 Trouble Ticket Generation2.1.3.3.1 Trouble tickets that include the fault type2.1.3.3.2 Trouble tickets that include a date and time stamp2.1.3.3.3 cust2.1.3.3.4 Trouble tickets that include the customer name and identification

2.1.3.3.52.1.3.3.6 Trouble tickets that include contact information2.1.3.3.7 Trouble tickets that include a fault description

2.1.3.3.8

2.1.3.3.9

2.1.3.3.102.1.3.4 Trouble Ticket Handling

2.1.3.4.1

2.1.3.4.2

2.1.3.4.3

Facilitation of easy registration and speedy resolution of customer complaints

Notification of customers, users or user groups when a trouble ticket is created, modified or closed

Display of open trouble tickets of the concerned customer, so that the CSR can identify if the fault is being reported for the first time and to provide the customer with existing faults status

Viewing and updating, by the CSR, of problem descriptions, trouble categorizations, severity classifications and contact information for open trouble tickets

Provision of the CSR, based on the reported fault type, with a series of questions and answers that improves their ability to diagnose problems and guides towards problem resolution

Trouble tickets that include subscription information, such as service type

Trouble tickets that include the customer segmentation, treatment profile and service level agreement

Trouble tickets that include other information, such as the stated repair date

Population, by the CSR, of the trouble ticket via drop-down lists whenever possible (eg, for fields such as fault type)

Acceptance and follow through of customer complaints and faults, tracking the progress continually in trouble ticketing and problem management

Integration with ACD and CTI protocols to provide proper customer profile identification, forward the request to the suitable CSR and assist the CSR in completing the trouble ticket

Receival of a trouble ticket from an external system, such as a NMS, via a standard interface

2.1.3.4.4

2.1.3.4.5

2.1.3.4.6

2.1.3.4.72.1.3.4.8 Storage of line test results and comments with the trouble ticket

2.1.3.4.9

2.1.3.4.10

2.1.3.4.112.1.3.4.12 Facilitation of manual and automatic routing of tickets

2.1.3.4.13

2.1.3.4.14

2.1.3.4.15

2.1.3.4.162.1.3.4.17 Association of work orders and subtasks with trouble tickets

2.1.3.4.18

2.1.3.4.19

2.1.3.4.20

2.1.3.4.212.1.3.4.22 Closing of trouble tickets by assigning an appropriate resolution2.1.3.4.23 Reopening of trouble tickets2.1.3.4.24 Grouping of related trouble tickets

2.1.3.4.25

2.1.3.4.26

2.1.3.4.27

Customer profiles that show whether the customer account, service and supplementary services are in active, inactive or disconnected states

Provision of a valid reason, such as nonpayment or an exceeded credit limit, for disconnected services

Display of current open trouble tickets as well as the trouble ticket history for a selected service

Authorized manual override of trouble ticket priority assignment, as well as an audit trail for manual priority overrides

Checking and display of previous and current service orders for the service in question

Storage of the steps required to resolve the fault and the expected repair date

Cross-allocation of faults to other personnel or departments and the ability to schedule

Robust integrated workflow that ensures trouble tickets are owned and managed across various departments

Facilitation of single ownership of trouble tickets within a department or group in order to enhance accountability

Consolidated view of customer problems that includes location information, customer facility or equipment details, symptoms and recommended instructions for troubleshooting

A view of all activities associated with a trouble ticket and the ability to determine their current status

A single consolidated view of the inquiries, service requests and problem reports affecting either a particular customer or all customers in an organization

Access to a shared knowledge base containing known solutions, in order to diagnose and solve problems quickly

Setting up of escalation rules to alert supervisory staff that a trouble ticket SLA response time is in jeopardy or breach.

Setting up of escalation rules to ensure that key issues needing resolution within the organization are automatically escalated to priority status

Maintainance and restriction of access to trouble tickets by grouping or storing them by department or work group

Interfacing with the network trouble ticket management system to get real time updates regarding network availability status and network outages

Interfacing with the billing system to provide waivers as part of the trouble ticket resolution

2.1.3.4.28

2.1.3.4.29

2.1.3.4.302.1.4 Self Care (Web Interface)2.1.4.1 Secure access for all customers and users2.1.4.2 Access to account and subscription details2.1.4.3 Customer logging of inquiries and complaints2.1.4.4 Customer requesting, canceling or amending of services

2.1.4.5

2.1.4.6

2.1.4.7

2.1.4.8

2.1.4.92.1.4.10 Multilingual interface as per customer preference2.1.4.11 Information that is dynamically updated to reflect the latest status

2.1.4.122.1.4.13 Language specific frequently asked questions2.1.4.14 Context sensitive help2.1.4.15 Product recommendations2.1.4.16 Requests to be contacted2.1.4.17 Customer requesting of a copy of invoices on-line2.1.4.18 Customer ordering of accessories on-line2.1.4.19 Customer activation of services on-line2.1.4.20 Customer viewing of both current and historical invoices on-line

2.1.4.212.1.4.22 Customer viewing of unbilled charges on-line

2.1.4.23

2.1.4.242.1.4.25 Customer changing of the user name on-line2.1.4.26 Customer changing of the cost center on-line2.1.4.27 Customer ordering of corporate standard reports on-line2.1.5 Creating New Cases (Service Requests)

Receival of notifications of preventive maintenance work and the affected services from the trouble management centers, prior to work execution

Prevention of trouble reporting for the affected services based on the reported fault type

Receival of on-line information from the trouble management centers regarding known faults and their respective affected services

Allow subscriber to view account information, such as subscribed services and client promotions

View all billing information, current and historical, both billed and unbilled

Internet self-care that allows the user to view account information, such as the current balance, billing cycle and the date the next bill is due

Internet self care that allows the user to view information about subscribed services and subscribed supplementary services

Internet self care that allows the user to view client offers and promotions

Customer reporting of faults using the web interface. The fault report is handled in the call center as any other reported fault

Customer viewing of both current and historical itemized invoices on-line

Customer payments on-line, using, for example, a credit card, debit card or direct bank transfer

Notification of the customer by SMS or e-mail that the invoice is ready to view

2.1.5.1 Pre-configured case (service request) home page and data records

2.1.5.2 Quick access to recently created, modified or viewed case records

2.1.5.3

2.1.5.4

2.1.5.5

2.1.5.6

2.1.5.7 Solution records can be associated with (hyperlinked to) case records

2.1.5.82.1.5.9 Comment and note records can be input into case records

2.1.5.10

2.1.5.11

2.1.5.12

2.1.5.13

2.1.5.14

2.1.5.15

2.1.5.16

2.1.5.17

2.1.5.18

2.1.5.19

2.1.5.202.1.6 Assigning Cases

2.1.6.1

Pre-configured case list views (case record subsets based on user-definable filter variables)

Multiple case data record "layouts" can be defined to handle cases and service requests with different processes and data needs

A workflow engine is available to help implement "best practice" case management activities

A mass e-mail function that can be used to send out responses to many people encountering the same problem

Open and closed (completed) customer service and support activities can be associated with (hyperlinked to) case records

Comments and notes can be kept private or made publicly available via the customer self-service portal

Documents and files can be associated with (hyperlinked to) case records

A predesigned customer self-service portal is available that allows customers to find their own solutions using the published knowledge base or request services and support over the web

New case records can be created by customers directly from a form on the company's web site

New case records can be created directly from the content of MS-Outlook e-mails sent by customers

When a new case record is created via customer input (using a web form or a self-service portal), an e-mail can be automatically sent to the customer confirming that a new case record has been created

A configurable case "status" data field is used to track the status of each case (e.g., new, escalated, on-hold, closed, etc.)

Any time a case record is created or updated, a history record (of the change) is automatically created and associated with the case

New case records and their status can be automatically made available to customers via a customer self-service portal

A variety of predesigned case management reports are available for immediate use

Predesigned case-related analytics (charts and graphs) are available for display on dashboards and reports

When new case records are created, they can be automatically assigned to the appropriate person using predefined assignment rules

2.1.6.2

2.1.6.3

2.1.6.4

2.1.6.5

2.1.6.6

2.1.6.72.1.7 Escalating Unresolved Cases

2.1.7.1

2.1.7.22.1.7.3 Escalation rules specify to whom the case will be reassigned to

2.1.7.42.1.8 Solving and Closing Cases

2.1.8.1

2.1.8.2

2.1.8.3

2.1.8.42.1.8.5 Service level agreement management2.1.9 Creating and Maintaining a Solutions Knowledge Base

2.1.9.1

2.1.9.2

2.1.9.3

2.1.9.4

2.1.9.5

When cases are assigned to someone, this person can be automatically notified of the case via e-mail

Case records can be automatically assigned to a work queue (using predefined assignment rules) that multiple people can access them from

When working from a work queue or a list of cases a user can simultaneously take "ownership" of multiple case records (i.e., assigning him or herself to the cases)

When working from a work queue or a list of cases a user can simultaneously assign the "ownership" of multiple case records to another person (or queue)

When working from a work queue or a list of cases a user can simultaneously change the status of and escalate multiple case records

When working from a work queue or a list of cases a user can simultaneously close multiple cases

Case escalation rules can be defined that will control the automatic escalation of a case if it is not resolved within a certain period of time

Case escalation rules can be defined that will control the automatic escalation of a case when specified conditions are met, including values input into custom data fields

Escalation rules specify all of the people who will be automatically notified via e-mail about the escalated case

Solution records (a knowledge base) can be searched for possible answers to the customer's problem

Solution records that address a case can be associated with (hyperlinked to) the case record

An e-mail can be automatically sent to the customer regarding the case and its possible solution (using a predesigned e-mail template)

The reason for the customer's problem can be input on the case record using a predefined list of "reason" codes or descriptors

New solution records can be automatically classified as such (i.e., new, draft or unreviewed) until they are formally reviewed and approved by authorized personnel

A workflow engine is available to help implement "best practice" solution knowledge base maintenance

While closing a case, a new solution record can be created and associated to the case ("on-the-fly")

Solution records can be selected for automatic publication to the customer self-service portal

Solution records can be "rated" by users and the highest rated solutions can be easily viewed and accessed

2.1.9.6

2.1.9.72.1.10 Customer Self-Service Portal2.1.10.1 Online registration and authentication using logins and passwords

2.1.10.2

2.1.10.32.1.10.4 Online access to open case or service request status2.1.10.5 Online input of new cases or service requests2.1.10.6 Online input of new orders2.1.10.7 Online access to order status2.1.10.8 Online access to archive of past invoices

2.1.10.92.1.10.10 Online customer satisfaction surveys2.1.10.11 Click'n Talk—online chat with service representative2.1.10.12 Voice over IP2.1.10.13 Web collaboration API2.2 Billing System2.2.1 Company Management2.2.1.1 Query by company2.2.1.2 Limitation amount company entries2.2.1.3 Built-in backup scheduling2.2.1.4 Security and password setup by company2.2.1.5 Scheduled file maintanance2.2.2 Security Management2.2.2.1 User password protection2.2.2.2 View or print security level only2.2.2.3 Update security level2.2.2.4 Save security level2.2.2.5 Delete security level2.2.2.6 Clear security level2.2.2.7 Return security level2.2.2.8 Operational auditing2.2.3 Deposit Management2.2.3.1 Original amount tracking2.2.3.2 Amount paid tracking2.2.3.3 Amount owed tracking2.2.3.4 Balance deposit tracking2.2.3.5 Deposit refund code tracking2.2.3.6 Deposit payment type tracking2.2.3.7 Deposit reference tracking2.2.3.8 Deposit interest management

Solution records can be associated with (hyperlinked to) other related solution records

Any time a solution record is created or updated, a history record (of the change) is automatically created and associated with the solution

Product detail records that are associated with (hyperlinked to) an opportunity that is "won," can be automatically associated with the account record (as assets or purchased product records)

Online access to the company's published solution knowledge base to find solutions to their problems

Direct prospects to a local dealer or partner with a partner locator application

2.2.3.9 Deposit refund management2.2.4 Rate Management2.2.4.1 Unlimited number of rates2.2.4.2 Flat rate2.2.4.3 Minimum rate2.2.4.4 Usage rate2.2.4.5 Minimum and overage rate2.2.4.6 Multiple flat item charges and usage2.2.4.7 Surcharges2.2.4.8 Deferred contract2.2.4.9 Maximum and minimum bill amount2.2.4.10 Zero bill amount2.2.4.11 Minimum service term2.2.4.12 Monthly service date2.2.4.13 Minimum usage2.2.4.14 Prorate minimum charge and allowance2.2.4.15 Stair step rate2.2.4.16 Charge minimum rate in advance2.2.4.17 Variance calculation by percentage or usage2.2.4.18 Variance usage from last year or last month2.2.4.19 Unique first and final bills2.2.5 Payment Management2.2.5.1 Payment date tracking2.2.5.2 Payment amount tracking2.2.5.3 Payment type tracking2.2.5.4 Payment by service2.2.5.5 Payment entry by batch2.2.5.6 Payment entry by lockbox module2.2.5.7 Payment entry by ACH module2.2.5.8 Payment entry by credit card module2.2.5.9 Payment entry reconciliation function2.2.5.10 Payment overdraft safety feature2.2.5.11 Payment barcoding2.2.5.12 Check scanner interface2.2.6 Penalty Management2.2.6.1 Flat rate2.2.6.2 Sum of percentage and flat rate2.2.6.3 Grater or lesser of percentage or flat rate2.2.6.4 Greater or lesser of balance as a percentage or flat rate2.2.6.5 Inclusive of previous penalties2.2.6.6 Inclusive of tax charges2.2.6.7 Inclusive of final bills2.2.6.8 Inclusive of inactive accounts2.2.6.9 IInclusive of returned checks2.2.6.10 Inclusive of adjustments2.2.6.11 Liens and surcharges2.2.6.12 Interest applied daily or monthly2.2.6.13 Custom penalty calculaions

2.2.6.14 Grace date functionality2.2.7 Tax Management2.2.7.1 Multitiered structure2.2.7.2 City tax2.2.7.3 County tax2.2.7.4 State tax2.2.7.5 Federal tax2.2.8 Report Writer2.2.8.1 CBSW standard package2.2.8.2 CBSW custom reports2.2.8.3 Export functionality2.2.8.4 Import functionality2.2.8.5 Sort functionality utilizing user codes2.2.8.6 Limit functionality utilizing user codes2.2.8.7 Query functionality utilizing user codes2.2.9 History Management2.2.9.1 Transaction summary2.2.9.2 Account summary2.2.9.3 Balances2.2.9.4 Deposit history2.2.9.5 Lien history2.2.9.6 Usage history2.2.9.7 Work order history2.2.10 Billing Management2.2.10.1 Print exceptions2.2.10.2 Print bills2.2.10.3 Monthly billing option2.2.10.4 Quarerly billing option2.2.10.5 Semi-anually billing option2.2.10.6 Annual billing option2.2.10.7 Regular bills2.2.10.8 Final bills2.2.10.9 Seasonal bills2.2.10.10 Refunds billing2.2.10.11 Interest billing2.2.10.12 Budget billing2.2.10.13 Contract billing2.2.10.14 Sorting ability2.2.10.15 Verify and edit functions2.2.10.16 Move in and move out functionality2.2.10.17 Budget billing options2.2.10.18 Bill cycle management2.2.10.19 Calculate unique first and final bill2.2.10.20 Early payment discount2.2.10.21 Late fee penalty2.2.10.22 Late fee interest2.2.10.23 Shutoff list2.2.10.24 Forfeit discount

2.2.10.25 Bank drafts2.2.10.26 Generation of work orders with final bills2.2.10.27 Generation of notices2.2.10.28 Posting of fees and penalties2.2.10.29 Billing Analytics2.2.10.30 Changing Budget Billing Plan2.2.10.31 Bill Information / Bill Correction2.2.11 Adjustment Options2.2.11.1 Auto adjustments2.2.11.2 Miscellaneous charges2.2.11.3 Return checks2.2.11.4 Refunds2.2.11.5 Adjustment codes management2.2.11.6 Reverse payments2.2.11.7 Account adjustments2.2.11.8 Usage adjustments2.2.11.9 Rate code adjustments in mass2.2.12 Notices and Labels2.2.12.1 Custom notice design function2.2.12.2 Internal audit notices2.2.12.3 Bank-draft notices2.2.12.4 Bill notices2.2.12.5 Collection notices2.2.12.6 Interest notices2.2.12.7 Mailing labels2.2.12.8 Owner and landlord notices2.2.12.9 Penalty notices2.2.12.10 Receipt notices2.2.12.11 Return-check notices2.2.12.12 Service order notices2.2.12.13 Shutoff notices2.2.12.14 Tax lien notices2.2.12.15 E-coder notices2.2.12.16 Late payment notices2.2.12.17 Operational emergency notice2.2.13 Search Capability2.2.13.1 Search on account number2.2.13.2 Search on service ID2.2.13.3 Search on service address2.2.13.4 Search on customer name2.2.13.5 Search on service description2.2.13.6 Search on street name2.2.13.7 Search on social security number2.2.13.8 Search on driver license number2.2.13.9 Search on phone number2.2.14 Customer Billing2.2.14.1 General Requirements2.2.14.1.1 General

2.2.14.1.1.12.2.14.1.1.2 The latest technologies, such as OOAD, C / C++ and Java

2.2.14.1.1.3

2.2.14.1.1.4

2.2.14.1.1.5

2.2.14.1.1.6

2.2.14.1.1.72.2.14.1.1.8 Capability to scale up

2.2.14.1.1.9

2.2.14.1.1.102.2.14.1.2 Customer Billing System Features

2.2.14.1.2.12.2.14.1.2.2 Symmetrical multiprocessing2.2.14.1.2.3 Operating system with 64-bit technology

2.2.14.1.2.4 Hot swapping of CPUs, controller cards, ECC memory, etc.2.2.14.1.2.5 Ethernet2.2.14.1.2.6 Mirrored disks, such as RAID, for storage2.2.14.1.2.7 Backup devices, such as optical disks and DLTs2.2.14.1.2.8 Hot swapping of hard disks and RAID2.2.14.1.2.9 Adequate storage facility as defined in "Performance Measures"

2.2.14.1.2.102.2.14.2 Availability

2.2.14.2.1

2.2.14.2.2

2.2.14.2.3

2.2.14.2.4

Inclusion of the latest version of the software released by the manufacturer

Source code, together with system documentation, to enable in-house enhancement and maintenance

Flexibility to handle new products, services and supplementary services

An on-line GUI that allows for the creation, review and editing of products, services and supplementary services

Creation of products, services and supplementary services to be created or modified prior to a deployment date set by the user, while the changes take effect on the assigned date

Rating and billing modules that allow revenue sharing and billing for services delivered by SMS, so as to bill customers and to calculate the charges to be paid to the content and service providers

Hardware from world-renowned suppliers that carries all necessary user certificates and warranties

Redundancy for all the components, including the main processor, storage media and hardware for the communication network, such that no single point of failure will disrupt or degrade the designed level of performance

CPU with the latest industry standards, such as open systems and scalable architecture

A suitable database that meets the required interfacing, scalability and performance requirements

Architecture that ensures a high level of network availability through redundant or spare network components, backup links, load sharing links and advanced troubleshooting tools

Architecture that ensures a high level of systems availability through server clustering technologies capable of providing fast recovery in the case of hardware or software failures

Architecture that provides a shadow platform, acting as a disaster recovery site, which will be capable of supporting key business functions, though with a lower throughput

All platforms, whether hardware or software, needed for the disaster recovery site

2.2.14.2.5

2.2.14.2.6

2.2.14.2.7

2.2.14.2.8

2.2.14.2.92.2.14.3 Billing and Invoicing Requirements2.2.14.3.1 Bill Inserts (specific insert or inserts based on parameters)2.2.14.3.1.1 Rate class2.2.14.3.1.2 Service type2.2.14.3.1.3 Customer type2.2.14.3.1.4 Cycle2.2.14.3.1.5 Account group2.2.14.3.1.6 Geographical area2.2.14.3.1.7 Range of dollar value of bill2.2.14.3.1.8 User definable field2.2.14.3.2 Bill Processing2.2.14.3.2.1 Processing of bills for all customers2.2.14.3.2.2 Processing of bills for all types of un-accounted events2.2.14.3.2.3 Processing of bills for all value added services provided2.2.14.3.3 Billing Generation Capacities

2.2.14.3.3.1

2.2.14.3.3.2

2.2.14.3.3.3

2.2.14.3.3.4

2.2.14.3.3.5

2.2.14.3.3.62.2.14.3.3.7 Bill cycle financial information to the G / L account2.2.14.3.4 Non-recurring charges

2.2.14.3.4.1

Architecture that can redirect client access and fail over databases to surviving servers by using state-of-the-art technologies (load balancing, database clustering, etc.)

Availability of core CC&B modules while upgrade or maintenance is performed. The backup system can take over transparently in such circumstances

Architecture that ensures a high level of data availability through replication technologies capable of synchronizing main and disaster recovery sites

Efficient SAN devices (that allow stripping and mirroring with minimal performance degradation) and tape libraries for data storage and backup

Storage management software to ensure that data is not corrupted or lost in the case of hardware or software failures

Application of recurring and onetime charges, payments and credits, late payment fees, interest charges and adjustments based on the customer price plan at a number of different account levels

Re-rating of events (if required) using fixed or sliding tiers and total volume

Creation of bill summary sections by charge type and separating charge components for an event

Itemization of billing to allow for an optional detailing of all events in a date and time sequence

Custom bill messages on the bills, based on the customer type or segment, individual the customer or language chosen for each the customer or subscriber

Bill cycle control and verification reports to support the bill cycle approval process

Calculation of non-recurring charges for products, services and supplementary services

2.2.14.3.4.2

2.2.14.3.4.3

2.2.14.3.4.42.2.14.3.4.5 Calculation of penalties and other fees such as reactivation fees2.2.14.3.5 Recurring Charges

2.2.14.3.5.12.2.14.3.5.2 Charging for equipment rental, such as modem rental

2.2.14.3.5.3

2.2.14.3.5.42.2.14.3.6 Late Payments

2.2.14.3.6.1

2.2.14.3.6.22.2.14.3.7 Manually Added Charges

2.2.14.3.7.1

2.2.14.3.7.22.2.14.3.8 Bill Cycle Processing2.2.14.3.8.1 Parameterized and schedule-driven bill cycle processing2.2.14.3.8.2 Simultaneous processing of multiple bill cycles2.2.14.3.8.3 Robust and fully recoverable bill cycle processing2.2.14.3.8.4 Stopping and restarting of bill cycle processing at logical points

2.2.14.3.8.5

2.2.14.3.8.6

2.2.14.3.8.7

2.2.14.3.8.82.2.14.3.8.9 Viewing of billing cycle totals

2.2.14.3.8.102.2.14.3.8.11 Multiple invoice cycles2.2.14.3.8.12 Transfer of customers between bill cycles

Additional charges such as reactivation charges and installation charges

Charging for equipment, such as cables and modems and equipment repair

Flexible addition, changing or removal of one time charges based on the user defined criteria. Proper authorization and audit trail will be provided

Calculation of recurring charges for products, services and supplementary services

Flexible addition, changing or removal of recurring charges based on user defined criteria. Proper authorization and audit trail will be provided

Charging of recurring charges by a period different than the bill cycle, such as annual basis, multiple bill cycles or remaining days of the year

Calculation of late payments based on the account balance brought forward

Late payment fees that are charged based on a fixed amount or based on an interest rate charged over the delay period or a combination of both

Multiple additional fields that can be manually added to a specific customer invoice

Addition of these manually added charges at the account level or at the subscription level

Re-processing of a billing cycle in order to accommodate new billing or customer data

Configurable rounding of charges and the ability to carry forward of any non-charged amount to the next billing cycle

Automated bill reconciliation process to check that all charges in the processed bill cycle were billed

Identification of any discrepancies found in the reconciliation process, investigation of these discrepancies and reporting on any discrepancy found

Normal use of a monthly or bimonthly billing cycle for subscriber billing, but use of multiple cycle billing and out-of-cycle on demand billing as per a request from the customer, i.e., hot billing

2.2.14.3.8.13 Inclusion of all transactions that have arisen since the last bill run2.2.14.3.8.14 Dates for bill runs that can be defined in any language supported

2.2.14.3.8.15

2.2.14.3.8.16 Overlapping billing cycles2.2.14.3.8.17 Easy transfer of customers from one billing cycle to another

2.2.14.3.8.182.2.14.3.8.19 Marking of customers whose billing cycle should not be changed

2.2.14.3.8.20

2.2.14.3.8.21 Definition of two or more billing cycles on the same date in a month2.2.14.3.9 Discounts2.2.14.3.9.1 Flexible discounting mechanisms2.2.14.3.9.2 Discounts based on service category2.2.14.3.9.3 Discounts based on service type2.2.14.3.9.4 Discounts based on a specific service / contract2.2.14.3.9.5 Discounts based on a specific customer or group of customers2.2.14.3.9.6 Discounts based on specific times of day

2.2.14.3.9.72.2.14.3.9.8 Discount plans based on loyalty discounts, such as free units

2.2.14.3.9.92.2.14.3.9.10 Discounts could be flat or multitier discounts2.2.14.3.9.11 Assignment of customers multiple discounts plans2.2.14.3.9.12 Facility to manage discount plans and promotional free units

2.2.14.3.9.132.2.14.3.9.14 Set up of discounts with future start dates and end dates

2.2.14.3.9.152.2.14.3.9.16 Cross product discounting2.2.14.3.10 Taxes2.2.14.3.10.1 Calculation of taxes2.2.14.3.10.2 Flat and multitiered taxes2.2.14.3.10.3 Fixed amount and percentage based taxes

2.2.14.3.10.42.2.14.3.10.5 Editing of taxes

2.2.14.3.10.6

2.2.14.3.10.7 Interfacing to a stand-alone taxing system, such as Vertex or other

Assignment of new customer accounts to the most appropriate billing cycle based on the customer profile

Automatic or manual bulk transfers of customers' accounts between billing cycles

Exclusion of event records from an indefinite number of days before the date of the actual bill run and then run them in the next bill run

Flexibility to create discount plans for products, services and supplementary services

Discount plans based on cross service discounts, such as buy one product or service and get a discount on other products or services

Discounts that can be applied to individual accounts or to a free combination of accounts

Setting of discount schemes default active on the customer when activation runs

Definition of taxes that apply to all subscriptions and taxes that only apply to subscriptions located in a specified jurisdiction

Charging of selected taxes, such as tax stamps, only when the bill is paid

2.2.14.3.10.8 Setting of the type and level of taxation individually for every charge2.2.14.3.10.9 Display of different tax rates on the invoice2.2.14.3.11 Invoices

2.2.14.3.11.12.2.14.3.11.2 Flexible invoicing to customers with hierarchical accounts.2.2.14.3.11.3 Creation of different invoice formats by the user

2.2.14.3.11.42.2.14.3.11.5 Bar code printed on the invoice to control the revenue2.2.14.3.11.6 Changing of the bar code format without vendor assistance

2.2.14.3.11.7

2.2.14.3.11.8

2.2.14.3.11.9

2.2.14.3.11.10

2.2.14.3.11.112.2.14.3.11.12 Single invoice for single service or Summary invoice for multiple2.2.14.3.12 Billing Advice

2.2.14.3.12.1 Issuing of billing advice to inform the customer of his current usage2.2.14.3.12.2 Bill advice that is based on all processed usage records2.2.14.3.12.3 Bill advice that details all usage and its associated costs

2.2.14.3.12.4

2.2.14.3.12.5

2.2.14.3.12.6 Billing advice that does not have any impact on the customer account2.2.14.3.12.7 Charging of bill advice requests2.2.14.3.12.8 On screen and printed bill advice2.2.14.3.13 Normal Bills

2.2.14.3.13.1

2.2.14.3.13.2

2.2.14.3.13.32.2.14.3.13.4 Generation of a bill based on the customer account

Association of customer billing invoices with accounts that may have one or more services associated with them

Parameter-driven invoice format, in which fields are be added, amended and deleted without help from the vendor and whose layout is user configurable and flexible

Addition of new items and fields into the bar code without assistance from the vendor

Production of any invoice on demand, e.g., summary invoices for corporate clients with more than one account

Sending of invoices to multiple addresses within the customer hierarchy

Production of either detailed or not-detailed invoices on the subscriber level or on the customer level

Paper invoices, electronic invoices, WWW invoices, WAP invoices, e-mail, SMS and services provided through GPRS

Bill advice that includes recurring and non-recurring charges that will be incurred in the current bill cycle

Bill advice that does not include items that depend on the final bill, such as discounts, taxes and other charges, though excluded items are clearly indicated

A normal bill, issued at the end of the billing cycle, that reflects all usage, recurring and non-recurring charges during the current bill cycle

A normal bill that includes discounts, the customer's previous balance and all payments made by the customer during the current billing cycle

Creation of customer bills including all charges, payments and adjustments for all types of services based on customer preference

2.2.14.3.14 Bills on Demand2.2.14.3.14.1 Customer bills on demand

2.2.14.3.14.2

2.2.14.3.14.3

2.2.14.3.14.4

2.2.14.3.14.5

2.2.14.3.14.6

2.2.14.3.14.7

2.2.14.3.14.82.2.14.3.14.9 Charging of bill on demand requests2.2.14.3.15 Bills upon Subscription Termination2.2.14.3.15.1 Bills for customers terminating their subscription2.2.14.3.15.2 Bills that reflect the customer's usage up to a specified date

2.2.14.3.15.32.2.14.3.15.4 Bills that have the same format and content as the normal bill2.2.14.3.15.5 Bills that are based on all collected usage records2.2.14.3.15.6 Bills that detail all usage and associated costs

2.2.14.3.15.72.2.14.3.15.8 Recurring charges that are pro-rated

2.2.14.3.15.9 Bills that include all items including discounts, taxes and other charges2.2.14.3.16 Payment Receipts2.2.14.3.16.1 Receipts showing that the customer has fully paid the bill2.2.14.3.17 Split Bills2.2.14.3.17.1 Splitting of the customer bill into two separate bills

2.2.14.3.17.2

2.2.14.3.17.3

2.2.14.3.17.42.2.14.3.17.5 Bills that have the same format and content as normal bills2.2.14.3.17.6 Charging of split billing requests

Bills on demand that reflect the customer's usage from the last normal bill up to a specified date

Bills on demand that show the customer's previous balance and all payments made by the customer during the current billing cycle

Bills on demand that have the same format and content as normal bills, but are clearly marked as bills on demand and include the billed period

Bills on demand that include recurring and non-recurring charges that will be incurred in the current bill cycle

Bills on demand that do not include items that depend on the final bill, such as discounts, taxes and other charges, but that clearly indicate excluded items

Bills on demand that do not have any impact on the customer account. At the end of the billing cycle, a normal bill is issued reflecting all usage, recurring and non-recurring charges during the current bill cycle

Bills on demand that include discounts, the customer's previous balance and all payments made by the customer during the current billing cycle

Bills that show the customer's previous balance and all payments made by the customer during the current billing cycle

Bills that include recurring and non-recurring charges that will be incurred in the current bill cycle

Bills that can be split based on having a fixed amount in one bill with the other charges in another bill, if the total amount exceeds the first bill

Bills that can be split based on having usage charges in one bill and the remaining charges in another bill

Bills that show the customer's previous balance and all payments made by the customer during the current billing cycle

2.2.14.3.18 Convergent Billing

2.2.14.3.18.12.2.14.3.19 Bill Formats2.2.14.3.19.1 Multi-language bill printing based on customer preference2.2.14.3.19.2 Multiple fonts and font sizes

2.2.14.3.19.32.2.14.3.19.4 Elimination of the need for coding format changes2.2.14.3.19.5 Customization of a bill format for a specific customer

2.2.14.3.19.6

2.2.14.3.19.72.2.14.3.19.8 Bills that have multiple sections based on service type2.2.14.3.19.9 Specific format for each bill section2.2.14.3.20 Bill Messages

2.2.14.3.20.1

2.2.14.3.20.22.2.14.3.20.3 Prioritization of messages based on customer profile2.2.14.3.20.4 Addition of reminders to the customer's bill2.2.14.3.20.5 Tracking of all customer messages2.2.14.3.20.6 Messages that are in the same language as the bill2.2.14.3.21 Billing Limits

2.2.14.3.21.1 Setting of a billing limit, under which the customer bill is not printed2.2.14.3.21.2 User configurable billing limits

2.2.14.3.21.32.2.14.3.22 Bill Verification

2.2.14.3.22.1

2.2.14.3.22.22.2.14.3.22.3 An on-line invoice viewing tool

2.2.14.3.22.42.2.14.3.23 Bill Management Files2.2.14.3.23.1 Creation of bill management files

2.2.14.3.23.2

2.2.14.3.23.3

Convergent billing, providing customers with a single bill for multiple services

Quick and easy modification of bill formats using an on-line graphical-based tool with cut and paste features

A choice, for customer, of several bill formats that change the way services and usage details are displayed

Display or suppression of call details based on specified criteria and customer preference, such as usage type, service type and bill amount

Addition of multiple messages to the customer bill, so that it is a communication tool with the customer

Addition or suppression of specific messages to individual customers or groups of customers based on selected criteria, such as total bill amount, subscribed products and services and location

Updating of the customer account so that the charges are added on the next bill

Creation of a sample bill to be revised by the user before the bills are actually generated

Sample bills that are created for bills with different formats and for selected customers

Sample invoices that do not affect the invoice generation process or the customer account

Files that are used for the creation of bills for printing in predefined forms

Files that are used for the transfer of billing data in portable electronic record formats

2.2.14.3.23.42.2.14.3.24 Bill Printing2.2.14.3.24.1 Printing of bills in predefined forms2.2.14.3.24.2 Interfacing with bill printing facilities2.2.14.3.24.3 Multiple standard printing interfaces

2.2.14.3.24.4

2.2.14.3.24.52.2.14.3.24.6 Outsourced solution for printing bills, e.g., dynamic layout support

2.2.14.3.24.72.2.14.3.25 On-line Information

2.2.14.3.25.1

2.2.14.3.25.2

2.2.14.3.25.3

2.2.14.3.25.42.2.14.3.26 G / L Contents2.2.14.3.26.1 Revenues from billing2.2.14.3.26.2 Payments and adjustments2.2.14.3.26.3 Write-offs2.2.14.3.26.4 Receivables2.2.14.3.26.5 Deposits and advance payments2.2.14.3.26.6 Taxes2.2.14.4 Billing for Residential Customers2.2.14.4.1 Managing Tariffs2.2.14.4.2 Billing / Third Party Billing2.2.14.4.3 Budget Billing2.2.14.5 Billing for Commercial and Industrial Customers2.2.14.5.1 Managing Tariffs2.2.14.5.2 Complex Billing2.2.14.5.3 Billing / Third Party Billing2.2.14.5.4 Convergent Invoicing2.2.14.5.5 Managing Business Process Exceptions2.2.14.5.6 Billing Analytics2.2.14.6 Services for Customer Billing2.2.14.6.1 Management of the customer and account information2.2.14.6.2 Management of service information

Files that are used for the creation of databases for on-line billing inquiry

Bill printing that can be performed at the customer service offices based on the customer request or at the billing center

Generation of a bill print file for a selected group of customers in order to allow bill printing at a bill print facility or at a remote CSO without an on-line connection

Provision of a list of all necessary hardware and software (including all types of required user equipment at remote sites) for printing customer bills in predefined forms. These terminals are located at the branches distributed across the country. Dedicated links are used for providing connectivity from the branch to the central site

On-line display and reprints of the customer bill for the current bill cycle

Information that is accessible at the billing center and at the different CSOs

On-line customer bill information and current customer usage information to systems, such as IVR

Seamless access to archived bill information and display or printing of the customer bill at the billing center

2.2.14.6.3 Remote access to the customer care UI

2.2.14.6.4 Access to the billing system and to the service provisioning system

2.2.14.6.5 Management of PINs and PUKs in the most secure scenario2.2.14.6.6 Performance of credit limit checks in a near real time manner2.2.14.6.7 Payment and credit-control functions2.2.15 EBPP Services2.2.15.1 Acceptance of billing data in a flat file

2.2.15.2 Tools available for template design2.2.15.3 Single bill presentment template for each bill type2.2.15.4 Support multiple bill templates

2.2.15.52.2.15.6 Billing templates that can link to other web sites2.2.15.7 Billing template links that are modifiable with each billing cycle

2.2.15.8

2.2.15.9

2.2.15.102.2.15.11 Send special e-billings and e-notices in addition to regular billings2.2.15.12 Presentation of non-billing information on regular billings2.2.15.13 Sub-amounts in the payment detail

2.2.15.14

2.2.15.152.2.15.16 Addition or deletion of one or more billing accounts2.2.15.17 Turning on or off of e-mail notifications2.2.15.18 Ability for customer to request changes to biller information2.2.15.19 Customer specification of amount to be paid2.2.15.20 Accommodate partial payments, specified by the customer2.2.15.21 Creation of an ACH file2.2.15.22 Reversals of e-payments2.2.15.23 Allow customer to dispute charges online2.2.15.24 Detailed bill submission reporting capabilities2.2.15.25 New template submission reporting capabilities2.2.15.26 Payment settlement activity reporting capabilities2.2.15.27 Transaction history reporting capabilities2.2.15.28 Statistics on payments made via web portal reporting capabilities

3 Purchasing Management

Billing templates that can accommodate announcements, cross-selling ads or conditional logic

Network-based or web-based, sharable billing template design and modifiable without intervention by the software provider

Testing of new billing templates, along with test billing data, outside the billing production system

Billing templates that are modifiable without intervention by the service provider

Web-based payment registration process for customers to specify their bank account or routing and billing account data

Discontinuation of receiving or de-registration from the service of electronic bills

3.1 Profile of Suppliers

3.1.13.1.2 Suppliers may have more than one address

3.1.3 Store e-mail addresses, web sites and fax numbers in vendor profiles3.1.4 Associate items with vendors' descriptions

3.1.5

3.1.63.1.7 A primary vendor can be set as the default for each class3.1.8 Ability to vendor grouping for miscellaneous purposes3.1.9 Identifier for approved vendors3.1.10 Commentary about suppliers3.1.11 Allows one master vendor file for all modules in the system

3.1.123.1.13 Attaches documents to a vendor file3.1.14 Searches vendor file with wildcards3.1.15 Tracks vendor W9 and 1099 information

3.1.16 Detects dublicate vendor information upon entry of vendor information3.2 Rating of Suppliers3.2.1 Year-to-date description of purchases in dollar value, by supplier

3.2.2 Goods delivery times are maintained as statistics for each supplier3.2.3 Multi year statistical performance data3.2.4 Average of early days and late days delivery3.2.5 Rejected salvaged in number and dollar value

3.2.6

3.2.73.2.8 Maintains quality ratings of supplier products and performance3.2.9 Vendor rating statistics are automatically updated and reported3.2.10 Multiple search criteria for vendor performance data3.3 Requisitions and Quotations

3.3.1

3.3.2 Procurement system allows multiple line items and delivery schedules3.3.3 Requisitions can be approved in real time3.3.4 Processes requests for quotation (RFQ)3.3.5 Manage and update supplier's quotes for particular items

Fields for supplier data such as shipping methods, item references and conditions

Data related to bank, accounts, payment methods, currency, etc., are included in the payment profile

Vendor shipment process with terms and acceptance requirements for reception

Stores DBA name, Federal Tax ID, tax ID status, minority / woman / disadvantage business indicator, active / inactive flag, last date vedor utilized, prefered vendor flag and Dunn and Bradstreet number

Analyzes suppliers' PO fulfillment performance based on significant data points such as cost or price and quality

Historical tracking of supplier performance criteria, including crucial data on fulfillment satisfaction, delivery commitments and quality.

Users can manually enter requisitions, which update along with automatic entries

3.3.63.3.7 Quotation copies maintained for suppliers

3.3.8

3.3.93.3.10 Displays planned purchase orders3.3.11 Support competitive quoting3.3.12 Retain requisition history3.3.13 Monitors requisition processing time3.3.14 Creates blanket requisitions

3.3.15

3.3.16 Displays multiple account numbers on any line item on requisitions

3.3.17

3.3.18 Checks against the budget and pre-encumber requisition per line item3.3.19 Converts lines of requisitions to multiple PO or different vendors3.3.20 Combines multiple requisitions into one PO3.3.21 Hosted on-line catalogs for vendors3.3.22 Punch out catalogs from vendors within ERP system3.3.23 Sends, receives, record s and tabulates bids electronically

3.3.24

3.3.25

3.3.263.3.27 Copies information from one bid transaction to another3.3.28 Automatically generates a form letter for award and rejection3.3.29 Integrates "Supplier Network Services"3.4 Purchase Orders (POs)3.4.1 MRP requisition converts to a purchase order

3.4.23.4.3 Manually enter and send purchase order3.4.4 Assigns sequential PO numbers automatically

3.4.5

3.4.63.4.7 POs include the vendor's quotation number

3.4.8

Purchase requisition reference to project, account, program, contract and sales order

Returned / awarded quote information (quote effectivity range, lead item and minimum lots)

Manages supplier quotation file by item or product with purging based on user-defined criteria (for example, date)

Assigns default primary and secondary account codes for certain expenditures which can be overridden if needed

Creates and tracks all requisitions by date, by requester, by budget, by item, by action item, etc.

Enters bid process directly from requisitions based on total amount, line item amount or commodity code

Generates e-mails or postcard notifications to specific vendors that an RFP or RFB has been posted on the school's web site

Uses system tools to analyze bids by price, quantity and availability by entire bid or single line item

Conversion of a planned purchase order to a PO electronically forwarded to vendor automatically

Purchase order types including standard PO, blanket / contract, subcontract order / operation, purchase request and return-from-stock

Quotation entry includes data fields for effectivity dates and pricing discounts and percentages

Vendor selection algorithm based on lowest price quote, strong delivery time or preferred source status

3.4.9 Supplier and item data may set as defaults upon placing POs

3.4.103.4.11 Control of default order type, order series and warehouse code3.4.12 Matrix of vendors, by item, approved as alternate suppliers3.4.13 Contract and project number line item3.4.14 Order line and customer order line split for multiple deliveries3.4.15 Individual POs can handle more than one item

3.4.16

3.4.17

3.4.18

3.4.19

3.4.20

3.4.213.4.22 Blanket PO release control options

3.4.233.4.24 Ship a complete order or portions of an incomplete order3.4.25 Non-receivable items; No receipt expected3.4.26 Selected items in an order may be flagged for defect checking

3.4.27

3.4.283.4.29 Line-item-specific delivery dates3.4.30 Automatically calculates delivery times and dates

3.4.313.4.32 Users control text entry and display formats3.4.33 Purchase history is accessible in real time by supplier or part

3.4.34 System-generated POs may be routed for online review and approval

3.4.35 Purchase order line status includes released and closed indications

3.4.36

3.4.373.4.38 Confirms POs by product numbers or PO number3.4.39 POs may be associated with contracts that require lot traceability

Categorizes POs by single; recurring; maintenance, repair and operations supplies; specific project; or job-triggered orders

Individual components may be divided for multiple lead times, including categories such as dock-to-stock and preparation lead times

Codes for multiple deliveries of a specific item in a PO (may accommodate more than one date or location)

Purchase quantity includes the measurement unit and conversion (for example, "meter" or "piece")

System's item file correlates vendor part numbers to internal part numbers

System's item file maintains preferred vendors for specific parts as indicated by vendor number

Blanket POs may be issued, up to a specified quantity or dollar amount

Drop-ship, direct shipments, special order transit options traceable by serial number

Notes for internal purposes may be excluded from printing or printed when they're intended for external display.

PO line item comments may be entered in a user-defined or standard predefined format

Cost tables and codes may be parameterized by supplier groups, individual suppliers or companies

Purchase order status and confirmation notes on the product and supplier

Automatic system messages to follow up POs may be triggered by user-specified criteria

3.4.40

3.4.413.4.42 Separate purchase order sequence for each business unit

3.4.433.4.44 Workflow management: on-line approvals

3.4.45 Purchase card activity and software integration for all levels of data

3.4.463.5 Pricing

3.5.1 Price and discount table corresponds to individual suppliers and items

3.5.2

3.5.3

3.5.4

3.5.53.5.6 Pricing and discounting tables include effectivity dates

3.5.7

3.5.8

3.5.93.5.10 Price rounding determined by established rates3.5.11 Calculates PO price by searching price tables3.6 Vendor Contracts and Agreements

3.6.13.6.2 Agreement number designating common terms3.6.3 Defines normal contract and special contract types3.6.4 Contract effectivity dates (start and end)3.6.5 Users may enter agreement start dates (a signal date)

3.6.6 Contract terms may specify ranges for delivery dates and quantities

3.6.73.6.8 Schedule for delivery of each line item3.6.9 Users may choose to print an acknowledgement of the contract3.6.10 Purchase contract histories may be archived

Automatically flags past due deliveries and supports inquiries on future deliveries

Provision to track non-recurring charges associated with a line item of a purchase order, such as tooling or setup charges. Should be connected to the line item, but separately identifiable and reportable

Automatically generate a PO number and assign it for each PO sequence

Allow multiple buyers to procure same item for separate business units

Automatic update of an item's record based on the item's most recent purchase price

Orders may be discounted manually or automatically based on the order line

Price adjustments such as quantity discounts are determined from a grade table

Vendor price may be changed for a product class in multiple vendor agreements

Suppliers may be chosen manually on the basis of best pricing or discounting

Suppliers are chosen automatically on the basis of best pricing or discounting

Automatically updates prices and discounts based on a percentage or fixed amount

Agreements with suppliers may be discounted at different levels including the product level, product class level and a level for general terms

The price and discounts may be applied to the order total of the vendor agreement

3.6.11

3.6.123.6.13 Drills down from contracts to requests for bid or proposal level

3.6.14

3.6.15

3.6.163.6.17 Encumbers only a portion of a contract based on fiscal year3.6.18 Allows various contract periods, including multiple year contracts3.6.19 Closes and reopen contracts across fiscal years3.7 Management of POs3.7.1 Consolidates enterprise-wide purchasing as a central unit

3.7.2 Products classified within a purchase class default to a main vendor

3.7.3

3.7.43.7.5 Retain PO data for audit purposes (PO with electronic approval)

3.7.6

3.7.7 Forecasts the product reorder date (determined by stock estimates)

3.7.8

3.7.9

3.7.10

3.7.113.7.12 History of POs

3.7.13 Interface provides buyers with important purchasing criteria factors3.7.14 Maintains PO history information by item

3.7.153.7.16 Analyzes purchase statistics based on user-defined criteria

3.7.173.7.18 Determines, measures and reports statistics for purchase budgets

Standard documentation types for contracts, which can determine the contract status

Assigns contract data (automatically) to a purchase order line based on a link to MPS / MRP purchase requirements

Tracks and flags contract expiration or extension dates with sufficient lead time to extend or re-bid the contract

Triggers alerts based on user-defined thresholds when a certain amount of the contract is used (e.g., 75%)

Generates and sends notifications to vendors (in a user-defined format), when milestones or thresholds are met

Verifies (and holds if necessary) receiving transactions on the basis of controls defined during purchasing

Internal processing lead times provided based on products and warehouses

Determines product availability by subtracting outgoing orders from incoming receipts

Purchase suggestion field contains products identified from available stock or reorder points

Additional orders may be generated to designate special order characteristics

Users may issue stock replenishment orders based on predefined terms

Identification codes for purchasing agents sorted by warehouse or other method

Users may maintain purchasing files from any terminal, PC or workstation

In-depth reports on purchasing statistics defined by specific parameters

3.7.19 Compares budgets

3.7.20

3.7.21 Reports shortages and schedule information to suppliers in real time

3.7.223.7.23 Online tracking of PO maintenance history3.7.24 Identifies hard copy reprints as "Duplicates"

3.7.25 Accommodates tolerances of either percentages or dollar amounts3.7.26 Tracks freight by line item or lump sum3.8 Procurement Reporting and Online Reporting3.8.1 Requisition report and query

3.8.2 Purchase order report and query for planned POs and released POs3.8.3 Purchase order status and follow-up reporting or querying

3.8.4 Purchasing action recommended according to material requirements3.8.5 User-defined parameters for PO and receipt exception reporting3.8.6 Released purchase orders traced by part number

3.8.7

3.8.83.8.9 Committed POs may be reported or queried based on contracts

3.8.103.8.11 Reports or queries transaction data history for purchased items

3.8.12

3.8.13

3.8.143.8.15 User-defined reporting to aid contract renegotiation

3.8.16

3.8.17

3.8.18

3.8.193.8.20 Automatic reminder (closed-loop system) for corrective actions

3.8.21

Users may authorize supplier invoices on the basis of packaging slips or line level

Tracks consigned inventory, in real time, to include inventory segregation and payment control

PO commitments may be traced by accounting time period (30, 60 and 90 days)

Runs reports or queries on purchase orders based on parameters determined by users such as alphabetical supplier, due date, PO number or part number

Committed POs may be reported or queried based on formal supplier transactions

Reports or queries quotes sorted by supplier name or number or item name or number

Identifies unfilled order backlog by reporting or querying on PO buyer status (includes planned, firm planned and released)

Reports or queries POs by buyer performance (a comparison of price quoted to price paid as well as delivery time promised to actual date of receipt).

Users may query available balances and product consumption by warehouse

Alerts users with a list of stock actions (such as replenishment) or product actions that need to be resolved

Generates a list of the demand forecast for stock orders (may be based on seasonal activities, consumption, etc.)

Reminds suppliers about orders that have not been confirmed or delivered

Inputs or updates data upon product purchase or upon verification at warehouse arrival

3.8.22 Turnover frequency is tracked by product number and product group

3.8.233.8.24 Online views for history and related notes3.9 Repeat Procurement

3.9.1

3.9.2 Includes established effective dates in contract orders and line items3.9.3 Tracks quantity or dollar value ranges for contracts

3.9.4

3.9.5

3.9.6

3.9.7

3.9.8

3.9.93.9.10 Reports an item's pricing history by supplier

3.9.11

3.9.12

3.9.13 Reconciles and reports on POs automatically released to suppliers3.9.14 POs released by a supplier may be changed3.9.15 POs may require authorization upon release by suppliers3.9.16 Records and maintains supplier release transaction histories

3.9.17

3.9.183.9.19 Real-time matching of transactions with material shortage log3.10 Receipts for Procurement3.10.1 Reports information on goods reception3.10.2 Integrates with major shipping software3.10.3 Receipt order or receipt number3.10.4 Creates receipts based on the contract or project3.10.5 Multiple POs may be grouped as a single receipt for one shipment3.10.6 Automatically numbers receipts in sequence3.10.7 Calls up PO receipts in real time and updates inventory data

3.10.8

Users may determine the summary information that should be provided regarding warehouse and inventory

Users (with proper authorization) may issue blanket POs for specified items, quantities and time periods

Purchasing agent may establish special conditions for delivery by the vendor

PO line items maintain information pertaining to allocation, delivery and purchase

Shipping and delivery schedules for the vendor reported in physical or electronic formats

Users (with proper authorization) may chart activity in the receiving calendar

Creates blanket POs where the system issues automatic releases to production and notifies A / P (user-definable)

Queries on POs collected to the present date and display according to user-selected parameters

Delivery schedule may be sent electronically to suppliers (for example, via a file)

Delivery schedule updates may be sent electronically to suppliers (for example, via a file)

PO receipts may be generated for EDI (or any other electronic data exchange format) transactions, as determined by users

Predefined user parameters are used to match EDI (or any other electronic data exchange format) invoices with PO receipts

Calls up PO receipts, in real time, for items received or services rendered and updates inventory data

3.10.9

3.10.10

3.10.11

3.10.12

3.10.13

3.10.14

3.10.15 Provides receipts for materials requiring inspection upon reception

3.10.163.10.17 Receives and processes drop-ship orders by line item on a PO3.10.18 Records invoice to financial system as materials are received3.10.19 Handles obsolescence data for material under shelf life control3.10.20 Correlates quantities of the PO with the received invoice3.10.21 Maintains changes to the pricing of materials

3.10.223.10.23 Computes and posts price variances for standard cost accounting3.11 Online Requirements for Purchasing Management3.11.1 Create and use blanket purchase orders3.11.2 Provides a reference to a contract or master agreement

3.11.3 Create multiple releases, each relieving a committed amount

3.11.4 Multiple release capability at the line item level

3.11.5

3.11.63.11.7 Enters and amends quote responses for requisitions while online3.11.8 Online reporting to all vendors, which includes providing a PO3.11.9 Create a purchase order from an existing requisition

3.11.10 Search the vendor record via a short description of the vendor's name

3.11.11

3.11.12

3.11.13 Extracts and transmits PDF drawing files and other files to vendors3.11.14 Accommodates vendor self-service

Users may log and report on scrap or reject goods in real time based on a choice of PO, supplier and item parameters

Flags and updates using conversion factors when received unit of measure is different from ordered unit of measure

Issues a claim note when the packing slip differs in quantity from the receipt

Reports on material rejections (as for material tests and specification differences)

Reports on material rejections based on contract or project parameters

Issues shipping and credit documents to suppliers for returns or to obtain replacements for rejected materials

Provides receipts, in real time, for materials that do not require incoming inspection (goods that go to stores without intervention)

Maintains data on purchases for analyzing, project accounting and reporting

Provides a reference to the blanket purchase order that yielded a particular PO

Creates a new requisition similar to an existing requisition using a copy function

Multiple vendors for the same part are stored in a file; all vendors can be accessed for the same part with pricing visibility

Stores "vendor qualification level" (e.g. qualified, non-qualified and under evaluation)

3.11.15

3.12

3.12.1

3.12.2

3.12.3

3.12.4

3.12.53.12.6 Print a vendor performance report based on orders placed

3.12.73.12.8 Print a vendor performance report based on price variances3.12.9 Print a vendor performance report based on dollar volumes3.12.10 Print selected ship-to locations on a purchase order3.12.11 Automatically faxes a purchase order to vendor3.12.12 Electronically transmits POs to suppliers

3.12.13

3.12.14

3.12.15

3.12.163.12.17 Integrates with food services software4 Analytics4.1 Enterprise Asset Management Analytics

4.1.14.1.2 Asset information management capabilities4.1.3 Maintenance operations analysis4.1.4 Financial reporting and analysis capabilities4.1.5 Ability to manage asset information4.1.6 Decommissioning and disposal4.1.7 Identification of asset performance4.1.8 Financial reporting analysis4.1.9 Maintenance operations analysis4.2 Finance Analytics4.2.1 Tools for Planning, Budgeting and Forecasting4.2.1.1 Event-based planning process

4.2.1.2 Uses web infrastructure for data entry, analysis and real time updates

Internet vendor can electronically register and update its company information

Reporting and Interfacing Requirements for Purchasing Management

Print open PO detail information by vendor, item number, due date or dollar value

Generate past due reports by vendor or item number in due date sequence

Automatic reminder for overdue shipments sent to vendors via fax or e-mail

Print a vendor performance report based on shipment and purchasing history

Print a vendor performance report based on showing late deliveries (days late)

Print a vendor performance report based on rejects (number and percent)

Vendor profile fax numbers and e-mail addresses to be used for point-and-click transmissions of data to vendors

Inventory system interface updates the average unit cost of the item received

Inventory system interface increments on-hand quantity when a PO is received

Inventory system interface increments on-order quantity when a PO is opened

Management of business processes involving investment planning and specification and design

4.2.1.3 Users can define business rules and assumptions4.2.1.4 Users can define company standards4.2.1.5 Users can add supporting plan details and drill down4.2.1.6 Reporting on variances and change plans in real time4.2.1.7 Multicurrency capability4.2.1.8 Creates what-if scenarios4.2.1.9 Analyzes allocated costs and revenue4.2.1.10 Add and view annotations and process documentation4.2.1.11 Users can approve the budget from any state4.2.1.12 Supports multiple iterations of sign-off and review4.2.1.13 Tracks status of roll-up dimensions4.2.1.14 View history information on a planning unit4.2.1.15 Users can create detailed plans with multiple line item4.2.1.16 Multidimensional budgeting models4.2.1.17 Built-in audit trails report4.2.1.18 Cost center4.2.1.19 Activity-based budgeting4.2.1.20 Project and capital planning4.2.1.21 Sales forecasting4.2.1.22 Compensation planning

4.2.1.234.2.1.24 Extendable to full 360-degree enterprise analysis4.2.1.25 Web-Publishing Wizard4.2.1.26 Revenues and forecasts reports4.2.2 Financial Modeling4.2.2.1 General Ledger4.2.2.1.1 Financial performance reporting analysis4.2.2.1.2 Budget analysis4.2.2.1.3 Key financial ratio reporting analysis4.2.2.1.4 Operational performance analysis4.2.2.2 Accounts Receivable

4.2.2.2.1 A / R aging analysis4.2.2.2.2 Summarizes A / R account4.2.2.2.3 A / R functional performance analysis4.2.2.2.4 Customer credit analysis4.2.2.2.5 Profit and loss statements analysis4.2.2.2.6 A / R corporate self-appraisal analysis4.2.2.2.7 Cost / expenses report4.2.2.2.8 A / R cash inflow analysis4.2.2.2.9 Income statement4.2.2.2.10 A / R organizational effectiveness analysis4.2.2.3 Accounts Payable4.2.2.3.1 Summarizes A / P account4.2.2.3.2 Cash flow statement4.2.2.3.3 A / P performance analysis

Users can monitor revenues, expenses, cash flow, budget variances and other financial metrics

4.2.2.3.4 Balance sheet4.2.2.3.5 Risk analysis4.2.2.3.6 A / P vendor account analysis4.2.2.3.7 A / P cash outflow analysis4.2.2.3.8 A / P organizational effectiveness analysis4.2.2.4 Other Financial Analysis

4.2.2.4.1 Asset and depreciation analysis4.2.2.4.2 Provides multidimensional analysis4.2.2.4.3 Determines cash flows and funding needs4.2.2.4.4 Scenario testing and analysis

4.2.2.4.5 Indicative and real cash flow analysis

4.2.2.4.64.2.2.4.7 Captures the full financial impact of the transaction4.2.2.4.8 Integrated reporting and analysis

4.2.2.4.9

4.2.2.4.10

4.2.2.4.114.2.2.4.12 Enables quality initiatives such as six sigma, baldrige criteria4.2.2.4.13 Customizable management methodologies at user level

4.2.2.4.14

4.2.2.4.15

4.2.2.4.16 Compliance-ready to Sarbanes-Oxley4.2.2.4.17 Multiple reporting and analysis options4.2.3 Financial Consolidation4.2.3.1 Consolidation4.2.3.1.1 Ability to run sub-consolidations4.2.3.1.2 Maintains version control over different data sets

4.2.3.1.3

4.2.3.1.44.2.3.1.5 Ability to maintain and report local statutory amounts4.2.3.1.6 Calculate MTD, QTD and YTD balances4.2.3.1.7 Automatically generate cashflow statements

Includes pre-built financial statements (P&L, balance sheet and cash flow)

Tools for modeling (adding, deleting or changing) calendar or financial reporting periods

Supports multiple performance methods such as balanced scorecard and Stern Stewart's Integrated EVA Scorecard

Provides a unified view of enterprise financial information including key performance metrics

Includes pre-built financial statement relationships, ratios and valuation metrics

Allows the user to compare, Quarterly, YTD and annual results to budgets, forecast and history

"What-if" analysis capabilities for organization structure changes, potential acquisitions, divestitures, etc.

Support reporting in: US GAAP & IAS, Statutory, Tax, single and multiple currencies

4.2.3.1.8 Intercompany matching4.2.3.1.9 Intercompany sales and expense transaction elimination4.2.3.1.10 Multicurrency translations4.2.3.1.11 US GAAP consideration4.2.3.1.12 Minority interest calculations4.2.3.1.13 Drill down capabilities to the sub level for analytic review4.2.3.1.14 Web based design4.2.3.1.15 Consolidated weekly sales report by sub4.2.3.1.16 Non consolidated weekly sales report by sub

4.2.3.1.174.2.3.1.18 Controls management for financial and SOX reporting4.2.3.1.19 Organizational setup by legal entity4.2.3.1.20 Lock down subs ability to update data entry forms4.2.3.1.21 10K disclosure reporting4.2.3.1.22 Inner company transfer tracking and reporting4.2.3.1.23 Leases disclosure reporting4.2.3.1.24 Tax Issues disclosure reporting4.2.3.1.25 Country location disclosure reporting4.2.3.1.26 Other disclosure reporting types4.2.3.2 Auditability4.2.3.2.1 Traceability from loaded source balances to consolidated amounts4.2.3.2.2 Changes are tracked in logs4.2.3.2.3 Journal entries tracked by user4.2.3.2.4 Time-stamped journal entries4.2.3.2.5 Ability to generate a history of processing logs4.2.3.3 Validation and Commentary

4.2.3.3.14.2.3.3.2 Approval and rejection of workflow capabilities4.2.3.3.3 Define specific validations for a specific entity, BU, division

4.2.3.3.44.2.3.3.5 Add comments by account4.2.3.3.6 Add comments at any dimensional level4.2.3.3.7 Add attachments to data submissions4.2.3.3.8 Add comments and attachments to journal entries4.2.3.4 Organizational Hierarchies

4.2.3.4.14.2.3.4.2 Allow comparisons of multiple hierarchies

4.2.3.4.34.2.3.4.4 Central management of hierarchies4.2.3.4.5 Allows for multiple dated hierarchies

Open technology platform to enable automated data population of the data warehouse from acquisitions

Prevent a unit from "promoting" data until certain crosschecks or validations are met

Require variance explanations or commentary when variances meet certain conditions or thresholds

Roll-up / present data in multiple ways (i.e. Account Hierarchies, Product Hierarchies, etc.)

Dynamically report against a hierarchy with the ability to choose which levels of the hierarchy are displayed, preview the results and re-run the same report an infinite number of times with select and preview capabilities intact

4.2.3.4.64.2.3.5 Security4.2.3.5.1 Security around segregation of duties4.2.3.5.2 Security around date4.2.3.5.3 Security around functionality4.2.3.5.4 Role based security4.2.3.5.5 Password management capabilities4.2.3.5.6 Support for "single sign-on" and LDAP4.3 Reporting4.3.1 Accessibility4.3.1.1 Real time reports that access operational data stores4.3.1.2 Reports generated automatically4.3.1.3 Web query4.3.1.4 Ad-hoc queries4.3.1.5 Column-based indexing for faster data retrieving4.3.1.6 Navigates all connected relational databases4.3.1.7 Interactive data exploration with analytics4.3.1.8 Desktop interface to advanced analytics4.3.1.9 Supports multiple data sources and platforms4.3.1.10 Very large database (VLDB) drivers

4.3.1.11 Multiple table inserts

4.3.1.12 Table functions4.3.1.13 Access delimited ASCII files4.3.1.14 Access fixed format ASCII4.3.1.15 Schedule information alerts based on specified conditions4.3.1.16 24x7 server availability4.3.1.17 Real time access to operational data4.3.1.18 Report drill through from Traditional cubes4.3.1.19 Report drill through from Intelligent cubes4.3.1.20 Report drill through from Zero data cubes

4.3.1.214.3.1.22 Embedded production report writers4.3.1.23 Batch production and distribution of reports4.3.1.24 Combine multiple reports into a single "report dashboard"4.3.1.25 Export reports to other formats4.3.1.26 Multiple format support including HTML, Excel and PDF4.3.1.27 Java based reporting tool

4.3.1.284.3.1.29 Support object-oriented 4GL4.3.1.30 Graphical interface avoids complex languages like "C" or Java4.3.2 Features4.3.2.1 Step-by-step report creator

"What-if" analysis capabilities for organization structure changes, potential acquisitions, divestitures, etc.

Tree-style structure that logically organizes database columns into folders

Custom Java tag library reduces the amount of coding required to integrate reports into JSP pages

4.3.2.2 Point-and-click graphics tool4.3.2.3 Hide or drill down to detailed information4.3.2.4 Pre-set templates4.3.2.5 Save, schedule and publish reports4.3.2.6 Multiblock reports4.3.2.7 Report catalog and report serving4.3.2.8 P&L reporting4.3.2.9 Data-manipulation capabilities for row and cumulative totals

4.3.2.104.3.2.11 Desktop and web reporting interfaces4.3.2.12 Identify exceptions in report4.3.2.13 Automates the generation of reports4.3.2.14 Publishes report templates for others to be modified

4.3.2.15

4.3.2.164.3.2.17 Access to analytics from Microsoft Office applications4.3.2.18 Report wizards guide users through analytical and reporting tasks

4.3.2.194.3.2.20 Create metrics4.3.2.21 View, create, modify, print and forward reports4.3.2.22 Auto saving

4.3.2.234.3.2.24 Cascading style sheets

4.3.2.254.3.2.26 Support for Unicode4.3.2.27 Subsets creation for the logical groupings of information4.3.2.28 Nested crosstabs and charts4.3.2.29 Data explorer capability4.3.2.30 Report explorer capability4.3.2.31 Repository explorer capability4.3.2.32 Field explorer capability4.3.2.33 Graphical table linking4.3.2.34 Field mapping between databases4.3.2.35 Custom templates4.3.2.36 Preview window4.3.2.37 Asymmetric reporting provide a customized view of OLAP grids4.3.2.38 GUI, drag-and-drop development environment4.3.2.39 Add columns4.3.2.40 Add filters4.3.2.41 Create analytic workflows4.3.2.42 Calculate initial insights into the data quickly and easily

Cross-tabs enable breaking a report across an unlimited amount of categories

Formatting tools to change fonts, colors, styles, column and row sizes and alignment

Links to several reports on a single page without requiring them to do programming

Exception highlighting to show values in a report that are above or below a value range

Proactive drill-down options including automatic, conditional and in all supported formats

Financial reporting and analysis including intuitive ad hoc, OLAP and forecasting

4.3.2.43 User-defined groupings to define customized data groups

4.3.2.44 Embed live applications, Web sites and non-BI content within report4.3.2.45 End users able to view data in numerous ways4.3.2.46 On-demand paging table of contents4.3.2.47 Drill-through analysis4.3.2.48 Ability to search, filter and sort data4.3.2.49 Multiple selection criteria4.3.2.50 Ad hoc reporting into any application

4.3.2.51 Search capabilities for specific categories within cubes and reports4.3.2.52 Drill down within a PDF to other data sources or PDFs4.3.2.53 PDF drill down witihin the same document

4.3.2.544.3.3 Formatting4.3.3.1 Guidelines and vertical rulers4.3.3.2 Auto-arrange fields4.3.3.3 Drag-and-drop browse field data4.3.3.4 Drawing style interface4.3.3.5 Line drawing, box drawing4.3.3.6 Circles, ovals and boxes with rounded corners4.3.3.7 Moving and resizing objects4.3.3.8 Conditional font formatting4.3.3.9 Conditional formatting of text4.3.3.10 Vertical text rotation4.3.3.11 Fractional font size4.3.3.12 Format editor4.3.3.13 Format painter4.3.3.14 Horizontal page number4.3.3.15 Custom and bound images4.3.3.16 Graphic image support (BMP, TIFF, PCX, TGA)4.3.3.17 Redo and undo4.3.4 Metrics4.3.4.1 Wizard functionality to create simple or compound metrics4.3.4.2 Ability to set join specifications4.3.4.3 Ability to set VLDB (Very Large Database) properties

4.3.4.44.3.4.5 Percent-to-total metric types4.3.4.6 Transformation metric types4.3.4.7 Rank metric types4.3.5 Filters

4.3.5.14.3.5.2 Ability to set qualifications based on a relationship filter or metric4.3.5.3 Custom expression creation4.3.5.4 Ability to create new metrics

Active reports with thin client disconnected thinkline analysis capabilities

Ability to perform null and zero value checks to identify how to handle data

Ability to filter on an attribute's form (ID, description, etc.) or on elements of an attribute

4.3.5.54.3.5.6 Ability to import filter elements from .xls or .txt files4.3.5.7 Ability to define output level of report data (i.e. attribute level)4.3.5.8 Attribution merge capability4.3.5.9 Metric-to-metric comparison5 Product Technology

5.1 Architecture

5.1.1 Data Integration Technologies

5.1.1.1 Data Management Options5.1.1.1.1 Memory Resident5.1.1.1.2 Relational database design5.1.1.1.3 Objective oriented

5.1.1.1.4 Normalized tables5.1.1.1.5 SQL APIs for calls or data requests

5.1.1.1.6 Multi-RDBMS portability5.1.1.1.7 Transaction tracking system5.1.1.1.8 Replicates database master files, fields and structures5.1.1.1.9 Supports Disaster Recovery Institute procedures

5.1.1.2 Database Gateway Options5.1.1.2.1 IBM DB25.1.1.2.2 Microsoft SQL Server5.1.1.2.3 Oracle5.1.1.2.4 Other5.1.1.3 Server / Host Relational DBMS Options5.1.1.3.1 IBM DB25.1.1.3.2 Microsoft SQL Server5.1.1.3.3 Oracle5.1.1.3.4 Other5.1.1.4 Metadata Management5.1.1.4.1 Maintain basic data models5.1.1.4.2 Semantic data remapping and interpretation

5.1.1.4.3

5.1.1.4.4 Include data in the interrelationship details, regardless of data formats

Use of joint element list to use to join attribute elements and filter on result set

Storage of metadata model / global data dictionary for any applications or data sources

5.1.1.4.5

5.1.1.4.6 Common relational model for sharing data across multiple databases5.1.1.4.7 Interface to relational database structures5.1.1.4.8 Interface to CASE tool designs

5.1.1.4.95.1.1.4.10 Non-operational data warehousing

5.1.1.5 Logical Repository Model

5.1.1.5.1

5.1.1.5.2 Combine procedural and object-oriented components5.1.1.5.3 Capture complex relationships between system components

5.1.1.5.45.1.1.5.5 Define structure of distributed databases and data stores

5.1.1.5.65.1.1.5.7 Include inventory of hardware configurations

5.1.1.5.85.1.1.6 Repository Metadata Tools

5.1.1.6.1

5.1.1.6.2

5.1.1.6.3

5.1.1.6.4

5.1.1.6.5 Create objects that reference multiple sources or data formats5.1.1.7 Repository User Interface

5.1.1.7.1

5.1.1.7.2

Includes data description / definition language (DDL) for importing, editing, printing and generating DBMS data structures

Interface to system management or network configurator for automatic job execution

House system design criteria, database structures, data element links and interrelationships

Unify and reconcile enterprise data within and across all applications and platforms

Define network components and interrelationships in enterprise of a distributed application infrastructure

Identify hardware upgrade requirements and manage the upgrade / distribution process

Tool for modeling metadata (information about data, its structure and where it is stored)

Tools for analyzing source data, modeling target data structures and storing information

Source code analyzers for documenting program interdependencies and separating application logic from core data structures

Map source / host application data to data elements in an open system environment for coexistence, batch extraction or system migration

Uses meaningful terms and descriptions rather than data-schema terms and abbreviations

Central point of reference for retrieving and controlling enterprise information

5.1.1.7.3

5.1.1.7.4 Views information in the repository by using a browse feature5.1.1.7.5 Guide feature identifies what data is available and where it is used

5.1.1.7.6 Access to business rules and predefined queries for decision support5.1.1.7.7 Windows-based end user query and reporting tools

5.1.1.7.8

5.1.1.8 Non-operational Data Warehousing

5.1.1.8.1

5.1.1.8.2 Denormalized read-only database tables5.1.1.8.3 Data effectivity rating5.1.1.8.4 Data element time-sensitivity analysis5.1.1.8.5 SQL report writer query access5.1.1.8.6 External data warehousing tools and databases

5.1.2 Messaging Protocols

5.1.2.1 RPC Options

5.1.2.1.1 Asynchronous RPC

5.1.2.1.2 Synchronous RPC

5.1.2.1.3 OSF DCE RPC5.1.2.1.4 Proprietary or other

5.1.2.2 Message Oriented Middleware5.1.2.2.1 Sockets

5.1.2.2.2 Microsoft MSMQ

Concurrent access to the data with data locking and check-in and check-out integrity mechanisms

Combines information from different databases or data sources in one query or report

End user database environment designed for "what-if" modifications and queries

5.1.2.3 APIs5.1.2.3.1 API capability to all supported SCADA systems

5.1.2.3.2

5.1.2.3.3 DDE5.1.2.3.4 OLE, OLE2 and ActiveX5.1.2.3.5 ODBC, ADO and OLE DB5.1.2.3.6 Client / server API middleware

5.1.2.3.7 Published APIs to standard ERP functionality

5.1.2.3.8 Published APIs to specific vendor systems5.1.3 Device Interfaces

5.1.3.1 Device Interface Management5.1.3.1.1 Accept input transactions from a preformatted batch5.1.3.1.2 ASCII text file5.1.3.1.3 Accepts input transactions in a continuous process5.1.3.1.4 Continuous data load5.1.3.1.5 Multiple loads processed simultaneously5.1.3.1.6 Internal data validation / error checking5.1.3.1.7 Error file review and manipulation5.1.3.1.8 Data reprocessing5.1.3.1.9 Current data download processing status operator display5.1.3.1.10 Automatic maintenance of complete audit trail5.1.3.1.11 Automatic maintenance of error logs

5.1.3.2 Standard Device Interface Protocols

5.1.3.2.1 RS-232 communication protocol

5.1.3.2.25.1.3.2.3 Radio frequency (RF) / bar code reader5.1.3.3 Input Device Options5.1.3.3.1 Pen-based systems5.1.3.3.2 Voice recognition5.1.3.3.3 Touch screens5.1.3.3.4 Mouse5.1.3.3.5 Trackball5.1.3.3.6 Bar code5.1.3.3.7 Keyboard5.1.3.3.8 Gauges

Direct application interface to GIS including graphical representations of user-defined regions

I / O driver interfaces to bar code readers, automatic ID devices and gauges

5.1.3.3.9 Scanners5.1.3.3.10 Portable data terminals5.1.3.3.11 Radio Frequency (RF)5.1.4 Architectural Foundation

5.1.4.1 System Defaults and Parameters5.1.4.1.1 Generalized codes validation tables

5.1.4.1.2 Standard messages and reason codes5.1.4.1.3 Customized help windows5.1.4.1.4 Company-specific field help5.1.4.1.5 Security by user ID, password and user group5.1.4.1.6 User menus5.1.4.1.7 Operating system command options5.1.4.1.8 Database dump / load5.1.4.1.9 Archive history file reload5.1.4.1.10 Master file audit reporting5.1.4.1.11 Scroll and keyword search of displayed reports

5.1.4.1.125.1.4.1.13 Multiple printer assignment to users and to functions

5.1.4.1.145.1.4.2 Architecture Tiers5.1.4.2.1 Application server5.1.4.2.2 Database server5.1.4.2.3 Web server5.1.4.2.4 Integration or middleware server5.1.4.2.5 Presentation server5.1.4.2.6 Client5.1.4.3 Database Support5.1.4.3.1 All applications run on same database5.1.4.3.2 Multiple facilities can share the same database5.1.4.4 Hardware Architecture5.1.4.4.1 Multiple facilities can be run from one central location5.1.4.4.2 Server functions can be combined onto a single machine5.1.4.5 Hardware Fault Tolerance5.1.4.5.1 Mirrored disks5.1.4.5.2 RAID 5 disks5.1.4.5.3 Hot backup system5.1.4.5.4 Warm back-up system5.1.4.5.5 Database journaled5.1.4.5.6 UPS monitoring5.1.4.5.7 Redundant power supply5.1.4.5.8 Transaction protection via rollback5.1.5 Web Enablement

System cross-reference of files, fields, programs, menus and messages

Bar code control character sequences for printing preformatted documents

5.1.5.1 Degree of Web Enablement5.1.5.1.1 Intranet capabilities5.1.5.1.2 Extranet capabilities

5.1.5.1.35.1.5.1.4 Lookups processed online occur real-time5.1.5.1.5 Browses processed online occur in real-time5.1.5.1.6 Data validation processed online occur in real-time5.1.5.1.7 Transactions processed online occur in real-time5.1.5.1.8 Provides information on demand

5.1.5.2 Web Interface

5.1.5.2.15.1.5.2.2 API program interface5.1.5.2.3 Tool to build interface5.1.5.2.4 Pre-configured screens5.1.5.2.5 Third party tool to build interface5.1.5.2.6 Third party tools for drag-and-drop creation of interface5.1.5.2.7 Built-in tool for drag and drop web page design5.1.5.2.8 Administration tool kit

5.1.5.2.9 Setup tool kit

5.1.5.2.10 Uses plug-ins, helper applications and other existing off-the-shelf tools5.1.5.2.11 Customization and tailoring capabilities5.1.5.2.12 API configuration tool5.1.5.3 Web Forms5.1.5.3.1 Template extends basic HTML with SQL functions5.1.5.3.2 User-friendly control features5.1.5.3.3 Template generates web form5.1.5.3.4 Drag and drop to create web form5.1.5.3.5 Form creation5.1.5.3.6 Form entry validation5.1.5.3.7 Rich formatting functions for plain text, HTML text or URL strings

5.1.5.3.85.1.5.3.9 Form modification and customization5.1.5.4 Functionality5.1.5.4.1 Dynamic, embedded URL support

5.1.5.4.2 Reference resolution

5.1.5.4.3 Where-used queries5.1.5.4.4 Record creation5.1.5.4.5 Record update / modify5.1.5.4.6 Promotions and approvals5.1.5.4.7 Check-ins and check-out files

Connection of multiple sites and the extended enterprise using private lines or the Internet / intranet

Open database structures permits user or third party to write Web enabler

Templates include cookie, session, query, shopping and transaction features

5.1.5.4.8 Attaches references5.1.5.4.9 Reads and writes or modifies data at the browser level5.1.5.4.10 Manages query results from within the application5.1.5.4.11 Robust data type sets

5.1.5.4.125.1.5.4.13 High-volume, online transaction processing5.1.5.4.14 Function for generating e-mail, based on HTML form input5.1.5.4.15 User-defined procedures5.1.5.4.16 Both browser and non-browser access via TCP5.1.5.4.17 Simultaneous access to heterogeneous databases5.1.5.4.18 Deploys across multiple platforms

5.1.5.4.195.1.5.4.20 Integrates application and desktop applications

5.1.5.4.21 HTML push technology

5.1.5.4.22 Intuitive drag-and-drop tool for accessing ad hoc database information5.1.5.5 Security Levels

5.1.5.5.1 Base product security (the level of security supplied by vendor API)5.1.5.5.2 Encryption (SSL 3.0)5.1.5.5.3 Encryption for password transmission5.1.5.5.4 Encryption for data transmission

5.1.5.5.5 Cookies (to preserve state between successive pages or sessions)5.1.5.6 Encryption5.1.5.6.1 DCE support5.1.5.6.2 Server authentication5.1.5.6.3 Data integrity assurance5.1.5.6.4 User verification5.1.5.6.5 Digital certifications

5.1.5.6.6 DES data

5.1.5.6.7 IDEA5.1.5.6.8 Third party tools or modules5.1.5.6.9 Security zones5.1.5.7 Security Functions

5.1.5.7.1 CORBA access5.1.5.7.2 Accepts logins

Dynamic SQL statements from all form inputs, URL strings and environment

Message-based communication between business systems (using EDI or other document formats)

5.1.5.7.3 Routes connections to other systems or hubs5.1.5.7.4 Browser requests5.1.5.7.5 Remote agent for database access5.1.5.7.6 Moves results from one database to another database5.1.5.7.7 Communicates with remote agents and other hubs5.1.5.7.8 Transfers queries from agent to agent5.1.5.7.9 Merges data from multiple sources5.1.5.7.10 Communicates with other middleware5.1.5.7.11 Time data sequence number in each transaction

5.1.5.8 Security Management5.1.5.8.1 Role or task-based security scheme for individual users5.1.5.8.2 Coordinates Internet server security with database security5.1.5.8.3 On-spot security management5.1.5.8.4 Administration tools5.1.5.8.5 Tools provided to manage access5.1.5.8.6 Administrative monitoring5.1.5.8.7 Point and click security setup5.1.5.8.8 Creates transaction log5.1.5.8.9 Reads, writes and deletes permissions at the record or row level5.1.5.8.10 User authentication applied at data level5.1.5.8.11 Session management tools

5.1.5.9 Internet Commerce Protocols5.1.5.9.1 Secure Transaction Technology (STT)5.1.5.9.2 Secure Electronic Payment Protocol (SEPP)

5.1.5.9.3 Secure Electronic Transactions (SET)5.1.5.9.4 SSL5.1.5.9.5 PCT

5.1.5.9.6 Transport Layer Security (TLS)

5.1.5.9.7 E-mail: S / MIME

5.1.5.9.8 E-mail: UUEncode

5.1.5.9.9 E-mail: MIME5.1.5.9.10 Web browser functionality5.1.5.9.11 Application distribution capacity5.1.5.9.12 Business functionality web capacity

5.1.6 Organizational Structure

5.1.6.15.1.6.2 Graphical editor tool for structuring organizational connections

Graphical display of entities, business units, organizational units, departments, warehouses, employee groups and employees

5.1.6.3 Hierarchical connections between organizational groups

5.1.6.4

5.1.6.55.1.6.6 Hierarchical link of organizational or supply chain processes

5.1.6.75.1.7 Application Security5.1.7.1 Database-level security5.1.7.2 Program-level security5.1.7.3 Multilevel access passwords5.1.7.4 User authentication5.1.7.5 Digital signatures5.1.7.6 User, object and method access control5.1.7.7 Encrypting or decrypting of messages

5.1.8 Multisite Management5.1.8.1 Date format selection

5.1.8.25.1.8.3 Site-specific calendars5.1.8.4 Consolidation of all plant information5.1.8.5 Multi-plant availability and message review5.1.8.6 Networked multi-plant requirements processing5.1.8.7 Consolidation of supply requirements across multiple sites

5.1.8.8

5.1.8.9

5.1.8.10 Transfer of a resupply order for a component to another plant or site5.1.8.11 Passage of replenishment demand from one location to another5.1.8.12 Recognition of forecasted or planned interplant demand5.1.8.13 Creation of inter-facility resupply orders

5.1.8.145.1.8.15 Accounting of site-specific product and location costs

5.1.8.16 Prioritization of the order in which branch relationships are used5.1.8.17 Prioritization of relationships among facilities and sites

5.2 User Interface

5.2.1 User Configurability5.2.1.1 Configurable menus5.2.1.2 Menus vary depending on user ID

Hierarchical connections between organizational groups and external processes, sources and systems

Linkage of business procedures with organizational groups or individuals

Linkage of manual processes and external processes or systems with groups or individuals

Multiple date formats including month / day / year, day / month / year and year / month / day

Consolidation of various logical or physical sites into one DRP / MPS / MRP run

Consolidation of operating entity requirements for common procurement functions

Accounting of material and transfer costs (cost of goods) in transit between demand and supply locations

5.2.1.3 Drag-and-place menus per user5.2.1.4 Configurable user screens5.2.1.5 One-time only screen configuration5.2.1.6 Configuration can be saved as user default screen5.2.1.7 Configurable browse toolbars and options5.2.1.8 Configurable functions and process activities5.2.1.9 Fields displayed are configurable5.2.1.10 Field headings / titles are configurable5.2.1.11 Computed fields are configurable5.2.1.12 Charts and graphs are configurable5.2.1.13 Pull-down menu content is configurable5.2.2 Workstation

5.2.2.15.2.2.2 User interface supports multiple window views5.2.2.3 User can print any screen5.2.2.4 Users may have multiple sessions at the same time5.2.2.5 Screen content may vary depending on user ID5.2.2.6 Can make fields display-only5.2.2.7 Event-driven navigation5.2.2.8 Graphical / multi-media data displayed to user

5.2.2.95.2.2.10 Pull-down menus provided

5.3 Platforms5.3.1 Database5.3.1.1 Oracle 95.3.1.2 Microsoft SQL Server5.3.1.3 MySQL5.3.1.4 IBM DB25.3.1.5 Informix5.3.1.6 PostgreSQL5.3.1.7 Sybase5.3.2 Servers5.3.2.1 HP UX5.3.2.2 IBM AIX5.3.2.3 IBM iSeries (AS / 400)5.3.2.4 GNU / Linux (such as Debian, SUSE or Red Hat)5.3.2.5 Solaris (Sun OS)5.3.2.6 Windows NT 4.05.3.2.7 Windows 20005.3.2.8 Windows XP / Server 20035.3.3 Client5.3.3.1 Palm OS5.3.3.2 Other handheld OS5.3.3.3 GNU / Linux (such as Debian, SUSE or Red Hat)

Citrix or other application bridging product required for Web deployment

Displays information from other business systems such as ERP and OMS

5.3.3.4 Windows CE5.3.3.5 Windows 985.3.3.6 Windows NT Workstation5.3.3.7 Windows 20005.3.3.8 Windows XP5.4 Reporting5.4.1 Report Design and Formatting5.4.1.1 Embedded production report writers5.4.1.2 Step-by-step report creator5.4.1.3 Point-and-click graphics tool5.4.1.4 Hide or drill down to detailed information5.4.1.5 Pre-set templates5.4.1.6 Save, schedule and publish reports5.4.1.7 Multiblock reports5.4.1.8 Report catalog and report serving5.4.1.9 P&L reporting5.4.1.10 Data-manipulation capabilities for row and cumulative totals

5.4.1.11

5.4.1.125.4.1.13 Desktop and web reporting interfaces5.4.1.14 Identify exceptions in report5.4.1.15 Streamlines workflow processes5.4.1.16 Automates the generation of reports5.4.1.17 Publishes report templates for others to be modified

5.4.1.18

5.4.1.195.4.1.20 Access to analytics from Microsoft Office applications5.4.1.21 Report wizards guide users through analytical and reporting tasks5.4.1.22 Formulas such as sum, average, moving average, count etc.5.4.1.23 Functions5.4.1.24 Custom functions5.4.1.25 Batch production and distribution of reports5.4.1.26 Combine multiple reports into a single "report dashboard"

5.4.1.275.4.1.28 Export reports to other formats5.4.1.29 Create metrics5.4.1.30 View, create, modify, print and forward reports5.4.1.31 Auto saving5.4.1.32 Multiple format support including HTML, Excel and PDF

5.4.1.335.4.1.34 Cascading style sheets

Cross-tabs enable breaking a report accross an unlimited amount of categories

Add calculations such as sum, average, moving average and count to reports

Formatting tools to change fonts, colors, styles, column and row sizes and alignment

Links to several reports on a single page without requiring them to do programming

Exception highlighting to show values in a report that are above or below a value range

Proactive drill-down options including automatic, conditional and in all supported formats

5.4.1.35

5.4.1.365.4.1.37 Interface with Microsoft Analysis Services and Hyperion Essbase5.4.1.38 Multilingual user interface supports5.4.1.39 Subsets creation for the logical groupings of information5.4.1.40 Nested crosstabs and charts5.4.1.41 Data explorer capability5.4.1.42 Report explorer capability5.4.1.43 Repository explorer capability5.4.1.44 Field explorer capability5.4.1.45 Graphical table linking5.4.1.46 Field mapping between databases5.4.1.47 Custom templates5.4.1.48 Preview window5.4.1.49 Asymmetric reporting provide a customized view of OLAP grids5.4.1.50 100 percent Java reporting component

5.4.1.515.4.1.52 Support object-oriented 4GL5.4.1.53 Graphical interface avoids complex languages like "C" or Java5.4.1.54 GUI, drag-and-drop development environment5.4.1.55 Add columns5.4.1.56 Add filters5.4.1.57 Create metrices5.4.1.58 Create analytic workflows5.4.1.59 Calculate initial insights into the data quickly and easily5.4.1.60 User-defined groupings to define customized data groups5.4.2 Accessibility5.4.2.1 Report interaction at end users level5.4.2.2 End users able to view data in numerous ways5.4.2.3 Real time reports5.4.2.4 On-demand paging table of contents5.4.2.5 Drill-through analysis5.4.2.6 Ability to search, filter and sort data5.4.2.7 Web query5.4.2.8 Ad-hoc queries5.4.2.9 Column-based indexing for faster data retrieving5.4.2.10 Navigates all connected relational databases5.4.2.11 Interactive data exploration with analytics

5.4.2.125.4.2.13 Supports multiple data sources and platforms

5.4.2.145.4.2.15 Multitable inserts5.4.2.16 SQL databse access

Financial reporting and analysis including intuitive ad hoc, OLAP and forecasting

Integration with Microsoft Front Page and other HTML development tools

Custom Java tag library reduces the amount of coding required to integrate reports into JSP pages

Desktop interface to advanced analytics (business analysts, statisticians and programmers)

Very large database (VLDB) drivers to generate the most optimal results even from multi-terabyte databases

5.4.2.17 SQL "merge" command5.4.2.18 SQL "with" clause5.4.2.19 Table functions5.4.2.20 Access delimited ASCII files5.4.2.21 Access fixed format ASCII5.4.2.22 Multiple selection criteria5.4.2.23 Integrates ad hoc reporting into any application5.4.2.24 Schedule information alerts based on specified conditions5.4.2.25 24x7 availability

5.4.2.26 Search capabilities for specific categories within cubes and reports5.4.2.27 On-demand paging table of contents5.4.2.28 Real time access to operational data5.4.2.29 Traditional cubes5.4.2.30 Intelligent cubes5.4.2.31 Zero data cubes

5.4.2.325.4.3 Report Design and Formatting Control5.4.3.1 Guidelines and vertical rulers5.4.3.2 Auto-arrange fields5.4.3.3 Drag-and-drop browse field data5.4.3.4 Drawing style interface5.4.3.5 Line drawing, box drawing5.4.3.6 Circles, ovals and boxes with rounded corners5.4.3.7 Moving and resizing objects5.4.3.8 Conditional font formatting5.4.3.9 Conditional formatting of text5.4.3.10 Vertical text rotation5.4.3.11 Fractional font size5.4.3.12 Format editor5.4.3.13 Format painter5.4.3.14 Horizontal page number5.4.3.15 Custom and bound images5.4.3.16 Graphic image support (BMP, TIFF, PCX, TGA)5.4.3.17 Redo and undo5.4.4 Report Types5.4.4.1 Cross-tab reports5.4.4.2 Form-style reports5.4.4.3 Sub-reports5.4.4.4 Conditional reports5.4.4.5 Top / bottom reports5.4.4.6 Drill-down / summary reports5.4.4.7 OLAP reports5.4.4.8 Tabular reports or data visualization-enabled reports5.4.4.9 Financial reports

5.4.4.10 Compound reports that combine several reports into a single PDF file

Tree-style structure that logically organizes database columns into folders

5.4.5 Calculation Capabilities5.4.5.1 Statistical and hypothesis testing5.4.5.2 Fast query performance5.4.5.3 Real time forecasting5.4.5.4 Closed-loop transactional processing

5.4.5.5 Universal transaction to any communication device, wired or wireless

5.4.5.6 Transactional confidence ensured with scalability and fault tolerance5.4.5.7 Complex query IF-THEN-ELSE logic

5.4.5.8

5.4.5.9 SQL functions including percentile calculations, ranks and distributions5.4.5.10 Built-in on-line analytical processing (OLAP)5.4.6 Data Visualization Tools5.4.6.1 Slice and Dice5.4.6.1.1 Pivoting5.4.6.1.2 Dimension hierarchy5.4.6.1.3 Dimension tool5.4.6.1.4 Tiles5.4.6.1.5 Check boxes5.4.6.1.6 Radio button5.4.6.1.7 Drop-down boxes5.4.6.2 Graphs and Charts5.4.6.2.1 Features5.4.6.2.1.1 Color coding5.4.6.2.1.2 Peer graphics5.4.6.2.1.3 Multiscapes5.4.6.2.1.4 Dynamically change graphical views on the fly5.4.6.2.1.5 Zooming5.4.6.2.1.6 Customer key performance indicators (KPIs)5.4.6.2.1.7 Graphical display of Gantt charts and networks5.4.6.2.1.8 Interactive chart5.4.6.2.1.9 Chart description5.4.6.2.1.10 Chart legend5.4.6.2.1.11 Control limitations5.4.6.2.2 Types5.4.6.2.2.1 Bar charts5.4.6.2.2.2 Stacked bar5.4.6.2.2.3 Column5.4.6.2.2.4 Stacked column5.4.6.2.2.5 Line charts5.4.6.2.2.6 Area5.4.6.2.2.7 Numeric or date / time s-axis5.4.6.2.2.8 Pie5.4.6.2.2.9 Scatter plots5.4.6.2.2.10 Bubble

Custom function plug-ins for customers who designed algorithms for calculating scores and other statistical models

5.4.6.2.2.11 Gauge5.4.6.2.2.12 Gantt5.4.6.2.2.13 Funnel5.4.6.2.2.14 Multiple 2D and 3D charts5.4.6.2.2.15 Histograms5.4.6.2.2.16 Data constellations5.4.6.2.2.17 Paraboxes5.4.6.2.2.18 Time tables5.4.6.2.2.19 Charts and plots5.4.6.2.2.20 Animated reports5.4.6.2.2.21 Histograms5.4.6.2.2.22 Scatterplots5.4.6.2.2.23 Thermometer5.4.6.2.2.24 Data constellations5.4.6.2.2.25 GIS mapping5.4.6.3 Mapping Capabilities

5.4.6.3.1

5.4.6.3.25.4.6.4 Integration with Microsoft Office and Others5.4.6.4.1 Automatic generation of Excel Pivot Tables from the application

5.4.6.4.2 Reports against data stored in the Microsoft Analysis Services cube

5.4.6.4.35.4.6.4.4 Exports data into new Excel spreadsheet5.4.6.4.5 Exports to Excel template5.4.6.4.6 Embedded Excel5.4.6.4.7 Exports to MS Exchange5.4.6.4.8 Export to MS Mail5.4.6.4.9 Export to XML5.4.6.4.10 Export to PDF5.4.6.4.11 Export to character-separated values5.4.6.4.12 Export to RTF5.4.6.4.13 Export to disk5.4.6.4.14 Export to application5.4.6.4.15 Export to ODBC databases5.4.6.4.16 Export to lotus notes5.4.7 Distribution and Archiving

5.4.7.15.4.7.2 Scheduled delivery5.4.7.3 Alert or event-driven delivery5.4.7.4 Intelligent bursting5.4.7.5 Archiving of reports or any other content5.4.7.6 Expiration and versioning5.4.7.7 Two-way e-mail

Users can easily toggle between a map and business intelligence application to suit their needs

Mapping capabilities to view and analyze data with a geographical or spatial component in the context of a physical location

Reads and update Microsoft Access and SQL Server databases from within the application

Electronic distribution of any content via preferred delivery vehicles, e-mail, FTP or network printers or fax

5.4.7.8 Java reporting component5.4.7.9 .NET reporting component5.4.7.10 COM report designer component5.4.7.11 Use of portals to deliver customized information enterprise wide5.4.7.12 Distribution of content across enterprise with web applications5.4.7.13 Report delivery via Microsoft Excel5.4.7.14 Report delivery via portals5.4.7.15 Report delivery via e-mail5.4.7.16 Report delivery via Adobe Acrobat5.4.7.17 Reports can be distributed on a scheduled or alert-driven basis5.4.7.18 Report accessibility to mobile users5.4.8 Interactive Beans5.4.8.1 Presentation beans (graphs, crosstab and table)5.4.8.2 Data bean (query and calculation builders)5.4.8.3 OLAP beans5.4.8.4 Bean catalog to save, retrieve and manage analytical objects5.4.9 General5.4.9.1 Reports available online5.4.9.2 Local report printing (not centralized printing and distribution)5.4.9.3 Ad hoc inquiry capability from within the ERP product

5.4.9.4 Active or inactive status5.4.9.5 Remote printing5.4.9.6 UCC standard barcode readable labeling5.5 SaaS and Hosting Options5.5.1 Automatic system deployment and maintenance

5.5.25.5.3 Secure application and data access via vendor's provisioning5.5.4 Secure application and data access via administration

5.5.55.5.6 Secure application and data access via management tools5.5.7 Audit trail5.5.8 Scalable to thousands of potential users5.5.9 Application can be hosted within customer's secured environment

5.5.10

5.5.11 SAS-70 Level II Audit Certification of the hosted partner

Vendor addresses customization requirements for business functionality, data security, user interface, etc.

Secure application and data access via LDAP provisioning or single sign-on

Multitenant SaaS application to allow all users to receive application updates at the same time

5.5.12 SAS-70 Level II Audit Certification of the vendor per se5.5.13 Hosted single-tenent ASP delivery

5.5.14

5.5.15

5.5.16

5.5.17

5.5.18

5.5.19

5.5.20 Transport protocols

5.5.21 Deploys on-premise or delivered in a SaaS model

5.5.226 Specific Criteria6.1 General Ledger

6.1.16.1.2 Ability to process encumbrance accounting6.1.3 Ability to accommodate sub-ledgers.

6.1.46.1.4.1 Beginning Budget Balance6.1.4.2 Prior Year Transaction History6.1.4.3 Prior Year Budget Balances6.1.4.4 Year-to-Date Budget Activity6.1.4.5 Current Budget Balance6.1.4.6 Forecast Budget (Three budget cycles)6.1.4.7 Unspent / Remaining Budget Balance6.1.4.8 Beginning Transaction Balance6.1.4.9 Year-to-Date Transaction Activity6.1.4.10 Current Transaction Balance6.1.4.11 Beginning Encumbrance Balance6.1.4.12 Year-to-date Encumbrance Activity6.1.4.13 Current Encumbrance Balance6.1.5 Ability to require that all transactions are two sided and balanced.

Use of AJAX eliminates a need to reload an entire page every time user submits data to the server

User side is pure HTML, does not require any applets, Active X controls or any other plug-ins

The same application is used when the user is is working both on-line and off-line and has an identical look and feel

Runs with any browser on any platform and over slow connections (like dial-up)

All data is maintained in a relational database, which allows third party BI tools to access the data

Scripting language lets administrators write and maintain advanced or complex calculations through a point and click UI without knowing programming

Users can work off-line, disconnected from the Internet and replicate afterwards

Ability to provide for the maintenance of separate funds, each of which is a self-balancing set of accounts with all fund records being processed simultaneously by the common system.

Ability to accommodate real-time on-line inquiry capability for the following items:

6.1.6

6.1.7

6.1.8

6.1.9

6.1.10

6.1.11

6.1.12

6.1.13

6.1.14

6.1.15

6.1.16

6.1.17

6.1.18

6.1.19

6.1.20

6.1.21

6.1.22

6.1.23

6.1.24

Ability to allow one-sided transactions to authorized users and the related security. For examplei n order to correct out of balance situations or for budgeting. How could the system become out of balance?

Ability to adjust sub-system modules (e.g., A / R invoice, Fixed Asset, Purchase Order) with journal voucher. Describe how it appears in sub-system and general ledger reports.

Ability to drill down from summary account totals to the underlying detailed transactions and the original source document(s).

Ability to accommodate multiple open fiscal year calendars (indicate quantity that system can handle).

Ability to have an error file / screen / report where unposted transactions are stored for research and editing. Exception report created for supervisor review, correction and approval.

Ability to limit access to general ledger data by any element in the chart of accounts based upon security set-up.

Ability to define access controls by defining individual's read, write, update and delete access privileges.

Ability to "view" transactions posted and unposted batch processing throughout the processing day.

Ability to "query" a range of user-specified account numbers for any date and / or period range, with appropriate security control.

Ability to accommodate any electronic document, including images, as an attachment to transactions.

Ability to accommodate an accounting period calendar that is not month-driven (e.g., 13 4-week periods).

Ability to provide a cross-reference to offsetting "sides" of a transaction (e.g., automated link to the debit side of a credit transaction).

Ability to provide easy access to transaction inquiry, such as retrieval by check number, dollar amount, description or other variables.

Ability to calculate and present amount expended for each account as a percentage of annual budget, including open encumbrances and YTD expenditures.

Ability to support wild card searches of G / L transaction descriptions. (Ex.: find all records with an embedded *Phone*).

Ability for system to comply with other financial accounting and reporting standards set forth in GAAP and other mandated reporting requirements.

Ability for system to comply with other financial accounting and reporting standards set forth in GASB 34.

Ability to print reports to the screen, prior to sending to a local printer and ability to export to Excel. (Must be readable format.) Can forumlas such as sub-totals be included.

Ability to provide the validations and posting process rules necessary to ensure that the totals of the transaction ledgers reconcile to the account balances.

6.1.25

6.1.26

6.1.27

6.1.28

6.1.29

6.1.30

6.1.31

6.1.326.1.33 Ability to report and analyze cash balances

6.1.34 Ability to support cross-department and cross-fund account analysis.

6.1.356.1.36 Ability to accommodate a user-defined account code format.

6.1.37

6.1.38

6.1.39

6.1.406.1.40.1 Asset account6.1.40.2 Liability account6.1.40.3 Fund reserve / equity account6.1.40.4 Revenue account6.1.40.5 Expense or expenditure account6.1.40.6 Performance Measure (Memo accounts)6.1.40.7 Project (Work Order)

6.1.41

Ability to run Historical General Ledger reporting across fiscal and calendar years.

Ability to search chart of accounts for inactive accounts with no history (by user defined time period) / budget to permit batch deletion / inactivation.

Ability to allow entries to unlimited accounts with one journal entry (one credit and multiple debits, multiple debits and multiple credits, etc.) with validation of all transactions being in balance.

Ability to process enterprise and other proprietary funds according to CAFR and GAAFR requirements.

Ability for "Available balance" of account included when account detail is viewed (posted activity, un-posted activity and encumbered activity are included).

Ability to provide cash management functionality for managing cash account transactions including bank transfers.

Ability to provide bank reconciliation capabilities to reconcile cash accounts to bank statements. Provides ability to include checks, deposits, transfers transactions. Capable of uploading cleared check file from bank.

Ability to provide an audit trail that lists all transactions by account regardless of whether the account is active or inactive or whether or not the period is closed.

Ability to provide comparative financial information, including comparisons of current information with the same period last year, YTD last year, previous year ending balance and previous operating budget.

Ability to accommodate at the minimum the following chart of account code structure: Fund / Department / Division / Business Unit / Object / Subsidiary / Project

User Defined Category Codes to allow for adhoc grouping for reporting

Ability to accommodate elements that are alpha, numeric or alphanumeric.

Ability to designate each general ledger account by a user-definable "account type" as follows:

Ability to have an unlimited number of levels of structure for each segment of the Chart of Accounts. Please specify any limitations on the number in the Comments column. (Roll-up of accounts)

6.1.42

6.1.43

6.1.44

6.1.45

6.1.46

6.1.47

6.1.48

6.1.49

6.1.50

6.1.51

6.1.52

6.1.53

6.1.54

6.1.55

6.1.56

6.1.57

6.1.58

6.1.59

6.1.60

Ability for segments of the Chart of Accounts to be grouped on a user-defined basis into multiple reporting hierarchies.

Ability to allow elements of the account to be defined as either required or optional.

Ability to set effective dates when adding or deleting accounts and to validate account transactions based upon the effective date.

Ability to modify organization structure at any time using effective dating.

Ability to store the "cross-walk" or matrix associating old and new values after an organizational structure change.

Ability to track chart-of-account organization structure changes and report using the appropriate structure.

Ability to place a "hold" on or prevent future requisitions to an account while continuing to allow outstanding transactions to be processed.

Ability to prevent deletion of an account with activity in any period unless activity was entered and subsequently reversed (e.g., fixing a mistake), within a user-specified period of time and with appropriate security privilege.

Ability to accommodate an unlimited description field for each element in the chart of accounts.

Ability to sustain leading zeros in account elements to be added automatically to save user keystrokes.

Ability to accommodate the different types of journal vouchers including standard, cash, direct payment, purchase orders, intradepartmental billings and other user-defined templates.

Ability to systematically generate sequential journal voucher numbers with proper audit trails. JV's should be numerically controlled and sequentially numbered with a full audit trail of all numbers.

Ability to accept both standard and recurring journal entries, with both the amount and / or account recurring.

Ability to ensure that recurring journal entries do not affect G / L until the appropriate effective or posting date.

Ability to accept both recurring journal entries and annual renewals with only default account information, with entry allowed for the amounts.

Ability to define separate workflow rules for each type of journal voucher.

Ability to allow the user to look up the chart of accounts on the screen as a reference during journal entry and to select the account.

Ability to make adjustments to budget, transaction and encumbrance balances through the use of journal entries in either batch or real-time with proper access privileges and approvals, maintaining an audit trail of all adjustments.

Ability to have an unlimited number of lines in any part of the journal entry.

6.1.61

6.1.62

6.1.63

6.1.64

6.1.65

6.1.66

6.1.67

6.1.68

6.1.69

6.1.70

6.1.71

6.1.72

6.1.73

6.1.74

6.1.74.1

6.1.74.2 Automatic carry forward of all pre-encumbrances and encumbrances

6.1.756.1.76 Ability to hold a fiscal year open indefinitely before closing.

6.1.776.1.78 Ability to have more than one fiscal year open.

6.1.79

Ability to enter journal entries for multiple departments and funds under one journal header.

Ability to provide default data within journal fields (e.g., year, date and period).

Ability to have an unlimited description field for each line in the journal entry.

Ability to pre-define the types of charges that can be posted to an account (e.g., labor to salaries). Input validation rules to be defined by system owner.

Ability to validate field values within the journal entry screen at time of data entry. Input validation and edit controls to be defined by system owner.

Ability to view the effect of the journal voucher in the general ledger before posting to double check debits and credits.

Ability to accommodate reversing journal entries that reverse the original transaction in one easy step.

Ability to reverse a journal entry in its entirety or at the line item level, as long as the adjustment is in balance.

Ability to reverse a group of journal entries in the current reporting period.

Ability to create a journal entry using a previously entered journal entry as a template (copy functionality).

Ability to identify and suppress inter-account transfers at year end to prevent overstatement of revenues and expenses.

Ability to support accrual journal entries, which can (optionally) automatically reverse themselves on user-specified dates in the following period.

Ability to run report on updated fund balance, on demand, based on previous year's revenue and expense activity with security.

Ability to provide user-defined year-end close pre-encumbrance and encumbrance rules and functionality, including:

User-initiated carry forward of user-selected pre-encumbrances and encumbrances

Ability to reopen a closed year multiple times, with the appropriate security and approval.

Ability to have more than one fiscal year open. Please specify any limitations on the number of periods in the Comments column.

Ability to initiate year-end processing at any point in time after the end of the fiscal year (i.e., doesn't have to occur on last day or on any particular day).

6.1.806.1.81 Ability to keep open more thatn one period.

6.1.826.1.83 Ability to perform closes at monthly, quarterly or annual periods.6.1.84 Ability to view all detail regardless if the period is closed or not.6.2 Accounts Payable

6.2.1

6.2.2

6.2.3

6.2.4

6.2.5

6.2.6

6.2.76.2.8 Ability to match items Invoice and Purchase Order.

6.2.9

6.2.10

6.2.11

6.2.126.2.13 Ability to support pre-encumbrances.

6.2.14

6.2.15

6.2.16

Ability to prevent transactions from being processed in closed prior years and unopened future years. System should generate an exception report that identifies any such attempts with the username, date, time, transaction type and entry that wasn't allowed.

Ability to start processing against any period in the new fiscal year prior to close of last fiscal year. Retroactive transactions are allowed.

Ability to maintains an accounts payable open-item (unpaid invoice) file which contains detailed records of invoices by vendor, invoice number and due date.

Ability to automatically select all unpaid invoices with due dates up to the current date and mark the invoices as paid, if no invoices were specified by the user, when checks are cut.

Ability to distribute invoice payments by item or total into multiple GL funds, accounts or programs.

Ability to automatically liquidate encumbrances for invoiced, encumbered purchase orders.

Ability to input invoice due date and hold invoice payment until the due date occurs.

Ability of the system to accumulate year-to-date figures by calendar year, fiscal year, quarter or other user-defined period for purchases by vendor and payments to vendor.

Ability to age and analyze accounts payable (e.g., open payables at end of specified dates )

Ability to schedule invoices for payment based on vendor terms, future dated invoices, etc.

Ability to delete or modify an invoice record before it is scheduled for payment.

Ability to notify the user when an invoice is processed on a purchase order that is over a user defined percentage of its limit.

Ability to default information from the purchase order to the invoice entry screen to simplify data entry.

Ability to automatically balance encumbrances in expenditure accounts to control accounts and reserve for encumbrance accounts.

Ability to manually or automatically relieve an encumbrance, either partially or completely, when an expenditure transaction is entered.

Ability to maintain and release recurring payments based upon user defined amounts and payment dates using an automatic batch process or real time transaction processing with the appropriate workflow approvals.

6.2.17

6.2.18

6.2.196.2.20 Ability to track anticipated cash requirements for disbursements.

6.2.21

6.2.22

6.2.23

6.2.24 Ability to accommodate electronic payments (e.g., EFT, ACH, etc.).

6.2.25

6.2.26

6.2.27

6.2.28

6.2.296.2.30 Ability to support electronic and digital signatures.

6.2.31

6.2.326.2.33 Ability to maintain multiple line items within one vendor 6.2.34 Ability to retain prior year(s) data for comparative reporting.

6.2.35

6.2.36

6.2.37

6.2.38

6.2.39

Ability to close out / reverse encumbrances and purchase orders by user defined parameters.

Ability to set up soft and hard stops for processing transactions with insufficient funds appropriations.

Ability to compare accounts receivable data to accounts payable to identify payees who owe the City payments, generate an email to appropriate user and provide the option to suspend payment.

Ability to drill across from a purchase order to and from the invoice and to and from the requisition.

Ability to utilize customizable workflow / approval options for payment process.

Ability to alert user of potential duplicate payments based on vendor number, invoice number, dollar amount and date, with the ability to override with the appropriate user security.

Ability to make payments automatically via multiple methods (EFT, Check, etc.).

Ability to establish a default payment method by vendor, but be able to choose an exception method as needed.

Ability to perform budget verification, with the ability to override with the proper authority.

Ability to provide positive pay export file with check funds for transmittal to bank.

Ability to interface with the bank to accommodate positive pay reconciliation.

Ability to support the use of procurement cards, interface with procurement card information and track procurement card holders.

Ability to automatically assign sequential numeric unique vendor numbers.

Ability to accommodate one time vendors and identify them as such. Allows for one-time payment without creating a permanent vendor in the master file. System retains information on name, date & amount of vendor payment.

The system should allow Vendors to be identified as 1099 vendors and associate their Tax-Id number. The vendor record should be flagged if a Tax ID is required but none has been furnished.

Ability to collect necessary information for generation of Federal 1099s at year-end (both manually and per IRS approved file).

Ability to distinguish betwwen different Federal 1099s types on vendor record

Ability to establish subsidiary or other relationships among vendors (e.g., Company A buys Company B), without losing the original vendor history.

6.2.40

6.2.41

6.2.42

6.2.43

6.2.44

6.2.45 Ability to change the 1099 status for all invoices for a selected vendor.

6.2.46

6.2.47

6.2.48

6.2.49

6.2.50

6.2.51

6.2.52

6.2.53

6.2.54

6.2.556.2.56 Ability to override default vendor discount terms.6.2.57 Ability to assign automatic voucher numbers in sequence.

6.2.58

6.2.59

6.2.60

6.2.616.2.62 Ability to accommodate account distributions by line item.

Ability to cross-reference subsidiary or other relationships among vendors for easy identification to the user.

Ability to correct 1099 information in the system, reprint the 1099 form(s) and produce a correction file for the IRS.

Ability to change a vendor's 1099 status at any time during the year and all existing activity will be automatically updated.

Ability for individual invoices to be included or excluded from 1099 income for a vendor as appropriate.

Ability for 1099 status for individual invoices to be changed after invoice has been posted.

Ability to accommodate user defined vendor categories (e.g., Disadvantaged Business Enterprises, Problem vendors, etc.).

Ability to track vendors without a W-9 (Request for Taxpayer Identification and Certification) form.

Ability to produce labels (or a label file for export) for vendors requiring a W-9.

Ability to maintain multiple location addresses for each vendor. Please utilize the Comments column to notate the maximum number of addresses for each vendor.

Ability to provide a vendor comment file that may contain a user-defined amount of information, viewable by any user but updateable only by users with authorized security.

Ability to maintain and print out an audit trail for changes to the vendor master file.

Ability for users with authorized security to add or change vendor master file records.

Provides the ability to add vendors "on the fly" during payables entry with the appropriate security level including an audit trail.

Ability to hide or delete inactive vendors after a user-specified period of time without activity, with appropriate workflow approval.

Ability to default vendor's remittance address from the vendor record when processing invoices, with override ability to another remittance address established on the vendor record.

Ability to allow for decentralized A / P invoice entry with centralized check / payment method printing.

Ability to have an unlimited number of detail and description lines per individual invoice transaction.

Ability to allow multiple invoices to be entered against the same purchase order reference, with validation of the total quantity and amount to be paid.

Ability to maintain multiple, user-defined multi-level approval routing tracks for voucher processing, which can vary by department and be dependent upon such things as dollar amount and / or vendor.

6.2.636.2.64 Ability to cancel a payment voucher.

6.2.656.2.66 Ability for credit memos to be applied against an open invoice.6.2.67 Ability to have line item approval on invoices.

6.2.68

6.2.696.2.70 Ability to schedule invoices for payment.

6.2.71

6.2.72

6.2.73

6.2.74

6.2.75

6.2.76

6.2.77

6.2.78 Ability to include "broadcast messages" on all checks in a check run.

6.2.79

6.2.80

6.2.81

6.2.82

6.2.83

Ability to change chart of account number distribution charges at the line item level on either requisition or PO, with appropriate user security restrictions.

Ability to process debit and credit memos by purchase order and / or line item.

Ability to record the credit memo on the vendor record and automatically apply it with the next invoice to be paid. Show total invoice amount and credit in accounts payable and on check distributed to vendor

Ability for changes or deletions to invoice information before generation of checks.

Ability to process invoices for which no purchase order exists, with the appropriate security.

Ability to allocate an invoice amount to various accounts according to a percentage of the invoice amount or by dollar amount.

Ability to automatically calculate discounts when the check payment date is the same as or prior to, the discount due date with override capabilities on discount due date.

Ability to enter A / P invoices paid through wire transfers or other electronic means without producing a check, but with the appropriate accounting affect on the General Ledger and other modules.

Ability to change the voucher distributions of an invoice before or after check is cut, with the appropriate update to General Ledger and other modules with appropriate security and approval.

Ability to create user-defined payment term calculations for a vendor, a purchase order or an invoice.

Ability to enter one-time or recurring comments on the check stub to a single vendor.

Ability to generate accounts payable checks daily, weekly, monthly or on demand.

Ability to generate checks based on pay dates established when invoices are entered and the range of dates selected for payment.

Ability to create an invoice list and preliminary check and electronic remittance register prior to check or remittance generation.

Ability to generate an electronic check register that can be printed and / or imported into another system.

Ability to generate individual checks that include payments from multiple funds.

6.2.84

6.2.85

6.2.85.16.2.85.2 Check number / Electronic Remittance Number6.2.85.3 Bank status (e.g., pending, completed, post-dated, etc.)6.2.85.4 Date(s) (e.g., payment date, etc.)6.2.85.5 Payee & Payee Address6.2.85.6 Approver and User ID6.2.85.7 Account number

6.2.86

6.2.876.2.88 Ability to compute the number of checks written per check run.6.2.89 Ability to produce manual checks.

6.2.906.2.91 Ability to ensure security on check writing signatures.

6.2.92

6.2.93 Ability to process separate checks for a vendor in the same check run

6.2.94

6.2.95 Ability to void checks by check number or group of check numbers.

6.2.96

6.2.97 Ability to allow an invoice to be re-established when a check is voided.

6.2.98 Ability to provide for restart procedures for the check printing routine.

6.2.99

6.2.100

6.2.101

6.2.102

Ability to compare control totals of invoices entered (amount) to total check run (amount) and permit correction before check production and / or electronic remittance production.

Ability to provide detailed audit trails with the following information:

Requisition number, Purchase Order Number, Invoice number and Contract Number

Ability to automatically update the vendor file with changes / cancellations when a check is cancelled.

Ability to automatically generate check numbers based on user-entered starting numbers.

Provides for blank check stock based check printing, including check format layout configuration, MICR encoding, digital authorized signatures, etc.

Ability to consolidate (or choose not to consolidate), at the Department level, multiple invoices for the same vendor on one check and itemize the invoices on the check stub.

Ability to prevent the printing of blank, negative or zero amount checks.

Ability to post voided checks to system in exact same manner as original entry with reversing entry to GL having date of void and / or current date, not original check date.

Ability to add comments or notes to a payment / entry that has already been processed, having no impact on financial information.

Ability to accommodate automatic reconciliation of bank information (i.e., by uploading data from tape or file).

Ability to produce a file containing all rejected check reconciliation transactions which could be available for online corrections (i.e., exception file).

Ability to retain cleared checks in a check reconciliation database for inquiry and / or reporting purposes.

6.2.1036.2.104 Ability to retain cleared check images for inquiry purposes.

6.2.105

6.2.106

6.2.107

6.2.1086.2.109 Ability to generate mailing list and labels for mailings to vendors.

6.2.110

6.2.1116.2.112 Ability to integrate with an inventory tracking module.6.2.113 Ability to interface with the asset tracking modules.

6.2.114

6.2.1156.2.116 Ability for vendor contracts to span multiple fiscal years6.2.117 Ability to compare actual contract amounts paid to units provided.

6.2.118

6.2.119

6.2.120

6.2.121

6.2.122

6.2.1236.2.124 Ability to provice City Council Check Register and Summary6.3 Purchasing

6.3.16.3.1.1 Input and store quantity, price and description6.3.1.2 Calculate and extend price6.3.1.3 Calculate total price

Ability to notify the user when checks become "stale dated" after a user-defined period of time and transfer check amounts to an "unclaimed check" account and automatically update G / L.

Ability to attach electronic documents (word processing, spreadsheet, scanned image files) to invoices, credit memos and other transactions in the Payable process

Ability to provide extended descriptions and include free form text for line items on Payables transactions

Ability to provide document work flow processing with electronic signature capabilities for approvals.

Ability for changes to the vendor master file to not effect vendor information on check history.

Ability to export vendor address information to other applications (MS Word)

Ability to allow for the set-up of contracts with recurring payments to vendors with the ability to make one-time payment amount adjustments without affecting the remainder of the contract payment schedule and amount.

Ability to provide for the identification of capitalized items as invoices are processed.

Ability to assign security rights to the following payables functions: Batch creation, invoice entry, invoice posting, payment generation.

Ability to identify specific invoices and payments for 1099 vendors as 1099 transactions.

Ability to view a 1099 report that identifies vendor that have been associated with a 1099 status, but do not have complete 1099 information.

Updates to annual 1099 forms should be provided with the annual software maintenance agreement.

Ability to print invoice total and amount for each invoice on the check stub and not individual line item.

Ability to have one payee with multiple supplier numbers for purchasing cards

Ability to enter or import multiple vendors and lines in same accounts payable screen - Multi-voucher processing

Requisition and purchase order process should include the following capabilities:

6.3.1.4 Retrieve vendor information automatically6.3.1.5 Hold purchase order pending issuance6.3.1.6 Report un-issued purchase orders6.3.1.7 Support cancellation of un-issued purchase orders6.3.1.8 Print purchase orders

6.3.1.96.3.1.10 Specify Unit of Measure6.3.2 Ability to export purchase orders as pdf files and email6.3.3 Ability to pull up specific account code or item when editing

6.3.46.3.5 Ability to view multiple line items / descriptions6.3.6 Ability to support encumbrance control for budgeted funds.

6.3.7

6.3.86.3.9 Ability to copy, paste all information.

6.3.10

6.3.11

6.3.126.3.13 Ability to receive, record and tabulate bids.

6.3.14

6.3.15

6.3.166.3.17 Ability to record and maintain history of purchases and volumes.

6.3.18

6.3.196.3.20 Ability to utilize the Internet for vendor communication.

6.3.21

6.3.22

6.3.23

Automatically retrieve purchase information on-line by referencing purchase order or requisition number or requesting department name or other user-defined criteria

Ability to correct a distribution error without having to back out of the PO and resubmit it

Ability to support "soft" pre-encumbrance control, whereby a warning is given if sufficient funds are not available.

Ability to copy information from one process to another without rekeying (i.e., requisition to purchase order).

Ability to attach electronic documents (word processing, spreadsheet, scanned image files) to requisition and purchase order transactions

Ability to drill down to all supporting documents, including attachments, within the purchasing system.

Ability to establish and maintain information concerning vendors, standards, terms and conditions.

Ability to process and track receipt of goods / services, including partial receipt of single item (e.g. services 35% complete).

Ability to track vendor performance including delivery, complaints and resolution.

Ability to track vendor performance against user defined criteria or standards.

Ability to support workflow for procurement approval process, including multiple approvals at the departmental and central purchasing levels.

Ability to support two-way, three-way and four-way matching of documents.

Ability to support automatic entry into other modules, such as inventory and fixed assets from purchasing.

Ability to integrate to an inventory tracking system with the ability to select items purchased and update quantities as received.

Ability to maintain history of all purchasing processes including requisitions, bid / quotes, multiple types of purchases and receiver information.

6.3.24

6.3.25

6.3.266.3.27 Ability to track last purchase date, PO and amount for any item.6.3.28 Ability to track all purchase history on an item.

6.3.29

6.3.30 Ability to track expenditures against credit cards issued to employees.

6.3.31

6.3.32

6.3.33

6.3.34 Ability to analyze vendor bids / quotations and make comparisons.

6.3.35

6.3.36

6.3.37

6.3.386.3.39 Ability to track vendor W9 & 1099 information.

6.3.406.3.41 Ability to track vendors by performance / history and date added.6.3.42 Ability to classify one-time vendors.

6.3.43

6.3.446.3.45 Ability to have numeric vendor numbers be system generated.

6.3.46

6.3.47

6.3.48

Ability for end-users to check expenditures to date against encumbrances and budgets and see results on-line in real time prior to processing an expenditure request.

Ability to support updating general ledger accounts for all procurement transactions.

Ability to look up real-time status of purchasing processes - due date, cost, net expense to GL, receiving’s, etc.

Ability to reopen a cancelled or completed PO with complete audit trail.

Ability to ensure that Purchase card banking activity is fully integrated with system for tracking purposes.

Ability to utilize imaged or scanned documents such as vendor invoices and other source documents.

Ability to support purchasing thresholds by vendor (e.g., $25,000 bid limit).

Ability for stock reorders to default to the primary vendor for the ordered item

Ability to support one master vendor file for all modules in the system, with security on the ability to change and / or update vendor records.

Ability to create and maintain comprehensive centralized active and inactive vendor master files with vendor name, multiple address, multiple contact information, total purchases, open purchase orders, term codes and numerous other user-defined fields.

Ability to store an unlimited amount of user defined vendor information.

Ability to maintain pricing information, quantity breaks, freight terms and shipping information for each vendor.

Ability to delete or deactivate vendor from vendor listing by date with reason. Historical data would be retained.

Ability to rate vendor at each event point (milestone) based on user-defined criteria as well as professional services.

Ability to search vendor files from within purchasing processes (i.e., requisition and purchase order).

Ability to create vendor groupings for specific locations or other user-defined criteria

Ability to maintain an accumulated purchase history for each vendor in system.

6.3.49 Ability to maintain an audit trail for changes to the vendor master file.6.3.50 Ability to change vendor name without losing the history.6.3.51 Ability to maintain a history of payments made to vendor.

6.3.52

6.3.536.3.54 Ability to allow transactions with valid vendors only.

6.3.55

6.3.56

6.3.57

6.3.58

6.3.596.3.60 Ability to enter a percentage discount on the requisition.6.3.61 Ability to enter future dates beyond the end of the fiscal year

6.3.62

6.3.63

6.3.64

6.3.65

6.3.66

6.3.67

6.3.68

6.3.69

6.3.70

6.3.71 Ability to provide for multiple lines of input per individual requisition.

6.3.726.3.73 Ability to notify requisitioner that requisition has been authorized.

6.3.74

Ability to detect duplicate vendor information upon entry of vendor information.

Ability to merge vendor records to ensure that duplicate entries are controlled.

Ability to allow the selective inactivation or purging of vendor records by user-defined criteria.

Ability to search for a vendor by item code, number or description (in other words, attach vendor to an item(s)).

Ability to accommodate vendor self-service that allows vendor e-registration and updating of company information through the Internet (with workflow approval before update).

Ability to maintain statistics in dollar amounts for each vendor for user-specified periods for the following criteria: payment history, discounts taken, discounts lost and purchase price variances.

Ability to effective date transactions, either before or after the current date.

Ability to record "competing quotes" for each procurement transaction and display them by total in a line item format.

Ability for competing quotes summary to include the numerous user defined fields like bid number, vendor name and address, dollar amount and comments.

Ability to summarize charges on an account and project level at the end of a purchase order.

Ability to disencumber the PO from the prior year; re-encumber and charge the expense to the current year

Ability to electronically process multi-delivery, direct ship, blanket and non-blanket requisitions.

Ability to assign default primary and secondary account codes for certain expenditures, which can be overridden if needed.

Ability to prioritize allocation of costs to various primary / secondary account codes by either percentage or fixed amount.

Ability to display multiple account numbers on any line item on requisitions.

Ability to Inquire, Add, Change, Cancel, Delete requisitions with the appropriate security

Ability to notify named authorizer that a requisition is waiting for approval.

Ability to restrict requisitioners' access to GL accounts within their jurisdiction.

6.3.75 Ability to assign approval thresholds based upon user defined criteria.

6.3.76

6.3.77

6.3.786.3.79 Ability to assign project and grant accounting data per line item.

6.3.80

6.3.81

6.3.82

6.3.83

6.3.84

6.3.85

6.3.86

6.3.87

6.3.88

6.3.89

6.3.906.3.91 Ability to create editable bid mailing lists of vendors.6.3.92 Ability to electronically send bids and RFPs.

6.3.93

6.3.94

6.3.95

6.3.96

6.3.97

Ability to query on or provide reports to users and management on requisition status.

Ability to create and track all requisitions by date, by requester, by G / L coding structure, by item, by vendor or any user-defined field.

Ability to check against the budget and pre-encumber requisition per line item.

Ability to modify items ordered through change order (add or delete) including part, class, quantity, unit of measure, vendor, cost, project, fund, with the appropriate security.

Ability for users to look up vendors based upon department utilization or any user-defined field.

Ability to copy requisition information from one already in the system with proper security.

Ability to track requisitions and automatically date and time stamp (received, accepted, returned, re-received) with notes and comments.

Ability to track requisitions and log requisition number, fund number, budget number, account number, division number, activity, project.

Ability to have flexibility in calculating taxes by line item and percentages to maintain pace with evolving government policies.

Ability to convert lines of requisitions to multiple purchase orders and different vendors.

Ability to flag requisitions for bid process by total amount or line item amount.

Ability to support the following types of bids: advertised sealed bids, phone and fax quotes, written requests for proposals / bids, requests for information and quotations.

Ability to access and update the vendor tables from within the bid / quote process with proper security.

Ability to enter bid process directly from requisitions flagged by monetary value.

Ability to generate emails or postcard notifications to vendor groupings (e.g., preferred vendors, geographic location) that a bid, RFI or RFP has been posted on the City website.

Ability to allow inquiry into entire bid or bid item by vendor name or number, bid number, buyer or item number.

Ability to provide entry by City staff of vendor quote responses, with the appropriate security.

Ability to use system tools to analyze bids by price, quantity and availability by entire bid or single line item.

Ability to copy information from one bid transaction to another with proper security.

6.3.98

6.3.99

6.3.100 Ability to create an electronic bid register of all participating bidders

6.3.1016.3.102 Ability to enter budgeted amount for a bid.6.3.103 Ability to track bid addenda (before opening and award).6.3.104 Ability to post award information on the Intranet and Internet.

6.3.105

6.3.1066.3.107 Ability to create user-defined contract releases.

6.3.108

6.3.109

6.3.1106.3.111 Ability to track service performance against a contract.

6.3.112 Ability to attach many and / or large volume documents to a contract.

6.3.113

6.3.114

6.3.115

6.3.116

6.3.1176.3.118 Ability to close and reopen contracts across fiscal years.

6.3.119

6.3.120

6.3.121

6.3.122

Ability to provide a facility for standard and prototype bids with any number of associated vendors.

Ability to track Bid / RFP by awards, dollar amounts, vendor responses and buyer.

Ability to track vendor bid list by vendor history, past awards, bid responses and new vendors.

Ability to convert awarded bid, including multiple and split awards, to approved contract(s).

Ability to create and track blanket order contracts and the ongoing associated dollar amount per account.

Ability to encumber contracts per line items and also assign project and grant accounting data across multiple accounts.

Ability to track multiple encumbrances and payments against a single contract.

Ability to allow multiple contracts per vendor, multiple items per contract and multiple dates.

Ability to trigger an alert of necessary updates or changes to existing documents based on the occurrence of certain events (e.g., update contract when name changes).

Ability to evaluate vendor based on key user-weighted events (delivery date, quantity return / defective items, billing problems).

Ability to track contracts by user defined criteria, such as: vendor, date (starting, ending), dollars, item, class, budget, account, program, renewals, cancellations, extensions, add / change, buying groups and contract number(s).

Ability to flag vendor indicating that an insurance certificate and bonds (e.g., payment, performance, maintenance, etc.) are on file.

Ability to track several purchase orders or other reference documents within a single contract.

Ability to carry forward approval and user contact information from the requisition to the purchase order.

Ability to support various contract periods, including multiple year contracts (i.e., those that span fiscal and / or calendar years).

Ability to record and track contract limits at user specified levels of detail over the life of the contract.

Ability to maintain a transaction listing of all contract change orders including date and source (to understand why changes were made, what amount, who approved, etc.).

6.3.123 Ability to encumber only a portion of a contract based on fiscal year.

6.3.124

6.3.125

6.3.126

6.3.127

6.3.1286.3.129 Ability to view payments to / from contract parties.

6.3.130

6.3.131

6.3.132

6.3.133

6.3.134

6.3.135

6.3.136

6.3.1376.3.138 Ability to process blanket purchase orders.

6.3.139

6.3.140

6.3.141

6.3.142

Ability to track and monitor contractor insurance and bond certificates and flag expiration dates.

Ability to track and flag contract expiration / extension dates. Provide the ability to set flag timing to build in lead time to extend or re-bid the contract.

Ability to automatically assign contract numbers to contracts (based upon user defined criteria).

Ability to store and maintain historical information in respect to all contracts, including but not limited to the following details: dollar value, milestones, start / end & extension dates, payment schedule and adjustments and other user-defined criteria.

Ability to track and report expenditures for each individual contract, including budget to actual comparisons by user-defined period (i.e., monthly, quarterly, daily, contract year, fiscal year, contract term, etc.).

Ability to break out multi-year contracts and allocate & report expenditures / revenues to specific periods.

Ability for contract periods to be user defined and include contract year, fiscal year and contract term for those contracts which span multiple fiscal years.

Ability to support detailed contract performance analysis and generate performance reports, based upon work completed to date and payments made / received.

Ability to attach comments to each contract for users with proper security to view and update. Comments could be free-form or standard user-defined (selected from a menu or drop-down list).

Ability to customize a City-wide purchase order layout / format (and create templates) including any user-defined fields

Ability to have multiple line items per purchase order with capability for one / multiple delivery schedules / locations; differing terms and conditions; and different tax applications per line printed on purchase order.

Ability to automatically number purchase orders with the optional ability to restart the numbering process with each fiscal year.

Ability to create purchase orders from requisitions, bid / quotes and contracts.

Ability to allow for unlimited standard and free form messages at the header and line item level.

Ability to send purchase orders to vendors in the following formats: electronic data exchange, fax, e-mail or printed copy (with electronic signature, where applicable).

Ability to generate bill to and ship to information automatically with secondary or internal delivery to location.

Ability to assign multiple general ledger account codings per line item to purchase orders with multiple project codes.

6.3.143

6.3.144

6.3.145

6.3.146

6.3.147

6.3.148

6.3.149

6.3.150

6.3.151

6.3.152

6.3.153

6.3.154

6.3.155

6.3.156

6.3.157

6.3.1586.3.159 Ability to accommodate partial receipts.

6.3.160

6.3.161

6.3.162 Ability to detect and measure early / late and over / under shipments.

6.3.163

Ability to produce notification when open, blanket or contract purchase order is about to be used up according to a user-defined dollar amount or percentage threshold or date.

Ability to print a revised purchase order immediately and for the dollar transaction, if any, to go to the GL.

Ability to generate an email notification to the buyer and department contact when any change is made to the purchase order.

Ability to Notify requisitioner and authorizer that a PO has been issued.

Ability to reprint hard copy of purchase orders and change orders when required.

Ability to automatically close a purchase order when all items are received and the final invoice is paid.

Ability to produce an open purchase order report listing all purchase orders by vendor name (alphabetical order), purchase order number, line item, description, quantity on order, quantity still open, buyer, account code and department.

Ability to automatically encumber final purchase order amount in general ledger, track differences and totals and update remaining budget.

Ability to allow annual automatic processing or renewal of on-going blanket purchase orders, with the appropriate workflow approval.

Ability to track freight by line item or lump sum and divide by total estimated / actual.

Ability for purchase order to specify multiple delivery dates and locations.

Ability to allow one purchase order to be charged to multiple cost centers, accounts or budgets.

Ability to allow purchase order to be tracked and monitored by buyer, vendor, item, class budget, dollars.

Ability to require approval for change orders over a user-defined percentage of the original amount.

Ability to ensure that changes to a PO result in automatic adjustments to encumbrance totals with audit trail.

Ability to notify specified users when orders have not been received after a user-specified period of time.

Ability to trigger Accounts Payable process based upon receipt information.

Ability to trigger a warranty start date in the fixed asset module associated with the receiving date.

Ability to identify damaged and / or goods and send a notification to the buyer, vendor and requestor.

6.3.164

6.3.1656.3.166 Ability to audit receiving data by logon ID, date, time, etc.

6.3.167 Ability to flag received goods for entry into inventory by item number.

6.3.168

6.3.169

6.3.170

6.3.171

6.3.172

6.3.173

6.3.174

6.3.175

6.3.176

6.3.177

6.3.178

6.3.179

6.3.180

6.3.181

6.3.182

6.3.183

6.3.1846.4 Budgeting

Ability to maintain discrepancy file by vendor, stock number, item, dates, control number, purchase order number (receiving exception file).

Ability to manually flag purchases for fixed asset tables upon receipt of good, with the appropriate security.

Ability to transfer encumbrances to the next fiscal year, at year end, either automatically or manually

Ability for system to integrate with common email platforms (MS Exchange) and allow Purchasing Department staff to automatically send electronic copies of purchase orders to vendor email addresses (tracked on the vendor record) to reduce time in the purchasing process

Ability for approval process to be integrated with the email system to notify approvals of need for approval.

Ability for system to provide document work flow processing with electronic signature capabilities for approvals.

Ability to save a un-issued requisition with requisition partial details, without routing for approval.

Ability to save a un-issued PO with partial details, before approval and issuance

Ability to provide on-line, on-screen requisition and purchase order forms for centralized and decentralized entry.

Ability to determine, by password or log-on, which department is requisitioning items and automatically default to information for that department.

Users have the ability to inquire on historical POs and easily convert them into a new requisition.

Ability to allow for default information for shipping and payment to reduce data entry efforts during ordering.

Ability to "duplicate" line item information during data entry to save time.

Ability to optionally close incomplete purchase orders at year end and effect the related encumbrances in the ledger.

Ability to automatically create un-issued Purchase Orders from approved requisitions.

Ability for the system to provide for alternate approver designation when approvers are unavailable.

Ability to automatically create vendor master file when bidder receives award, if the award was the first one the bidder received.

Ability to notify users of over-budget conditions at the requisition level. User must be authorized to override before proceeding.

System allows access to change historical purchase orders and have those changes be reflected in the appropriate changes to the related encumbrances, even after a fiscal period that the PO relates to has been closed.

6.4.1 Ability to control budget by all elements in the chart of accounts.

6.4.26.4.3 Ability to create integrated capital and operating budgets

6.4.46.4.5 Ability to distinguish between adopted and approved budget.

6.4.6 Ability to roll up to multiple business units / divisions into one budget 6.4.7 Ability to accommodate multi-year budget control.

6.4.86.4.9 Ability to freeze account after expiry date.

6.4.106.4.11 Ability to accommodate encumbrance control.

6.4.12

6.4.13

6.4.146.4.15 Ability to validate field values within the budget entry screen.

6.4.16

6.4.17

6.4.18

6.4.19

6.4.206.4.21 Ability to restrict access to confidential data by user.

6.4.22 Ability to provide different workflow and approval rules by department.

6.4.23

6.4.24

6.4.25

6.4.26

6.4.27

Ability to auto-calculate estimated tax impact on average home and buisness based on estimated budget

Ability to accommodate four or more budget cycles (Provisional, Annual, Bi-Annual & Forecast) for each year.

Ability to budget using G / L accounts that are effective-dated for the future budgeting periods.

Ability to accommodate pre-encumbrance control based upon funds availability.

Ability to validate pre-encumbrances, encumbrances and expenditures against the appropriation budget.

Ability to support budgetary allotments by month, quarter, year or other period as defined by the user.

Ability to apply rate factors to predetermined costs (e.g., PERA based on wages, Health based on election linked to table).

Ability for Departments across the City to access budget information on an inquiry basis for their unit, with authorized users only being able to make changes.

Ability to specify different cut-off dates for budget development for different users and groups of users.

Ability to specify different cut-off dates for budget development for different types of budget (i.e., operating vs. capital).

Ability to display information graphically (i.e. pie chart, bar chart, graph).

Ability to accept entry of budget requests at all organizational levels based on user authorization and security privileges.

Ability to track original budget, budget adjustment and budget transfer line items for each line item and appropriation.

Ability to prevent department level users from updating budget information after it has been submitted or as of a specific cut-off date.

Ability to export / import to common spreadsheet applications (Excel) at all points through the budget preparation process

Ability to attach files (i.e., Word, Excel) to particular issues, revisions and line items with the system.

Ability to budget by quantity and unit cost or by detailed listing of items, rather than total amount.

6.4.28

6.4.29

6.4.30

6.4.31

6.4.32

6.4.33

6.4.34

6.4.35

6.4.36

6.4.37

6.4.386.4.39 Ability to copy budgets from one cycle to another.

6.4.40

6.4.41

6.4.42

6.4.43

6.4.44

6.4.45

6.4.46

6.4.47

6.4.486.4.49 Ability to record budget credits (negative numbers).

Ability to allow Financial Planning Dept. to "push" via workflow system-embedded spreadsheets out to departments electronically for budget preparation.

Ability for Departments to "return" budgets back to the Financial Planning Dept. electronically via workflow.

Ability to track, through an audit trail, every movement of the departmental worksheets.

Ability to summarize and / or drill down into specific object codes (e.g., training) at the division department, and / or City-wide level.

Ability to summarize or roll up department / division worksheets into department budgets.

Ability to automatically notify supervisor if run looks over budget (i.e., if budget is more than 50% spent by July 1st)

Ability to automatically email supervisors with monthly budget update reports

Ability to roll up department worksheets into Citywide master budget at various user-defined levels.

Ability to utilize the project budgets created in the project accounting modules for creation or adjustment to department budget.

Ability to link to and develop relationships between the Operating and Capital Budgets.

Ability for Financial Planning Dept. to view progress by departments in budget preparation.

Ability to "lock" (prevent other changes to that budget version) budgets at any phase of the budget, including after submission by departments.

Ability to unlock a frozen budget with the appropriate security control at the department level unless it has already been submitted to the Financial Planning Dept.

Ability to develop both detail budgets, at any level of the chart of accounts and summary budgets in a distributed environment.

Ability to provide for data entry into multiple budget versions during budget preparation.

Ability to allow users to attach narratives and justifications to budget worksheets.

Ability to create multi-year plans (at least five years) with great detail in year one and less detail in the outer years for continual use in the ongoing annual budgeting process.

Ability for users to attach five-year strategic plans or program goals to budget worksheets.

Ability to allow documents (e.g., contracts, MS Word / Excel documents) to be attached to budget worksheets.

Ability to allow entering, storing and reporting performance data linked to programs and program budgets, including performance measures and results and associates these with financial data.

6.4.50

6.4.51

6.4.52

6.4.53

6.4.54

6.4.55

6.4.56

6.4.57

6.4.58

6.4.59

6.4.60

6.4.616.4.62 Ability to import standard templates and style sheets.6.4.63 Ability to provide document-publishing features including:6.4.63.1 Ability to produce high quality final budget document pages6.4.63.2 Ability to produce budget reports and documents in a PDF format

6.4.63.3

6.4.63.4

6.4.63.5

6.4.63.6

6.4.63.7

6.4.63.8

6.4.63.9

6.4.63.10

Ability to produce budget requests as decision packages, with a base request plus "budget issues", supplemental requests above or below base.

Ability to indicate, by line item, one time expenditures in the budget "issues."

Ability to allow users the option of including multiline text in budget issues for justification purposes.

Ability for user to list budget issues at any level in the hierarchical structure.

Ability to record various "review" dates (e.g., departmental review, Financial Planning review, Management Committee review, Council review / approval).

Ability to compare budget cycles to demonstrate budget changes that have been made between cycles.

Ability to compare budget versions to demonstrate cost changes that have been made between versions.

Ability to provide an "approved" or "not approved" flag to mark budget issues within a decision package by line item or by total.

Ability to provide for approval of budget issues within a decision package at an amount greater than, less than or equal to the amount requested.

Ability to forecast real account balances, revenues and expenditures for the remainder of the year based on historical trends, percentages or other specified parameters.

Ability to provide reports / inquiries, including graphs, to accommodate analysis of historical trends.

Ability to drill down to compare budgets to actual from highest level to lowest level of detail.

Ability to produce a the table of contents and index for all the budget document

Ability to provide the user with a function to create or enter footnotes and comments for budget publications

Ability to produce historical, current year projections and proposed budget data at any level of the hierarchical structure in a high quality printed form

Ability to include at a minimum the department name, description, mission, programs and program goals in the budget document

Ability to include performance measures and results in the budgetary documents

Ability to incorporate charts, graphs, spreadsheets, etc. in the budgetary documents

Capability to automatically update charts, graphs, spreadsheets, etc. when data stored in budget system is altered

Desktop publishing capabilities, i.e. flexibility in formatting, object placement, page layout

6.4.63.11

6.4.63.12

6.4.63.136.4.63.14 Ability to provide spelling and grammar check

6.4.63.15

6.4.64

6.4.65 Ability to provide the following budget worksheet information:

6.4.65.16.4.65.2 Year-to-date Actual6.4.65.3 Year-to-date Budget6.4.65.4 Bi-Annual-to-date Actual6.4.65.5 Bi-Annual-to-date Budget6.4.65.6 Original Current Year Budget for all cycles6.4.65.7 Modified Current Year Budget for all cycles6.4.65.8 Current Year Projected6.4.65.9 Bi-Annual Years Projected6.4.65.10 Next Four Years Budget

6.4.66

6.4.67

6.4.686.4.68.1 Zero balances in all accounts6.4.68.2 Current year's original budget6.4.68.3 Bi-annual original budget6.4.68.4 Current year's modified budget6.4.68.5 Bi-annual modified budget6.4.68.6 Last year's budget6.4.68.7 Last year's actual6.4.68.8 Current year's budget or actual plus / minus a percentage6.4.68.9 Previous year's budget or actual plus / minus a percentage

6.4.696.4.69.1 Straight line projection6.4.69.2 Percentage based on last year actual

6.4.69.3 Last year actual or budget for the remainder of the current fiscal year

Ability to incorporates non-budget information into the budget document such as the glossary

Capability to incorporate objects from various sources, including commercial clipart and photos

Ability to incorporates organizational chart from the HR system and / or produces organizational chart into the Budget

Ability for concurrent users to have access to the budget document publisher for preparation and editing purposes

Ability during budget formulation to access all expenditure and revenue line items currently in use by the financial system.

User specified number of years of historical budget and actual data (Specify any limits to the number of years in the Comments column)

Ability to provide worksheet information by month, quarter or user-defined period.

Ability to apply a percentage, fixed amount or other formula driven increase or decrease to a budgeted figure on a line-by-line basis, at both the department and corporate level and by nature of budget (e.g., salary and wages, gas, etc.).

Ability to create an initial version of the budget using the following:

Ability to forecast current year budget and actual (either on a line-by-line basis or on an entire budget) based on:

6.4.69.4 User-defined formula

6.4.706.4.71 Ability to perform what-if scenarios and save these scenarios.

6.4.72

6.4.736.4.74 Ability to budget by fund.6.4.75 Ability to budget for multi-year projects under one project name.6.4.76 Ability to control spending by revenue source.

6.4.77

6.4.78

6.4.79

6.4.806.4.81 Ability to adjust budgets within user-defined security profiles.

6.4.82

6.4.83

6.4.84

6.4.85

6.4.86

6.4.87

6.4.88

6.4.89

6.4.90

6.4.91

6.4.92

Ability to utilize multiple methods (Ex. straight line projection and percentage based on last year actual) within the same budget. Specify any limitations in the number of methods in the Comments column.

Ability to apply factors to specific items (e.g., apply different benefit rates to different types of wages and salaries).

Ability to create budget relationships (e.g., salary changes automatically adjust benefits and vice versa).

Ability to develop business plans by either facility or asset and automatically have the appropriate effect on the budget.

Ability to forecast future budget year salaries and benefits budgets based on current positions and employees.

Ability to enter budget adjustments in a pending status for final approval.

Ability, through workflow, to notify appropriate personnel of adjustments for approval and update to GL.

Ability to query available budget balances after taking into account expenditures to date,

Ability to drill down to all aspects of a budget amendment (moved to / moved from).

Ability to stamp all budget adjustment activity by: User, Date, Final Approval Number, Approval Date and others.

Ability to provide budget rollover functionally at the end of the fiscal year to automatically roll over encumbered balances to the new budget year

System is configurable to allow / disallow budget responsible individuals (with appropriate security levels) the ability to process Purchase Orders for accounts that have exceed a budget limit, when budget control levels have been exceeded.

Ability to display requested, recommended and approved budget amounts for the last and previous years.

Ability to display or print the requested, recommended and approved budget amounts for up to 5 historical years.

Ability to record and track multiple budget amendments during the year and inquire on the adjustments after the fact (including previous years) both on-screen and via reporting.

Ability to interface with the Payroll / HR module to assist in calculation of the personnel services budget.

Ability to support personnel cost projections that include fringe benefit costs (based on existing benefits elected accommodating percentage increases or dollar cost increases in benefit costs).

Ability to process personnel services budget through an interface with Payroll (dollars and FTE units) based on:

6.4.92.1 Requested Positions (FTEs)6.4.92.2 Budget Salary, Wage and Position Master Table6.4.92.3 Other Pays / Allowances Master File6.4.92.4 Employee Benefits by Employee Group6.4.92.5 Employee Benefits by Job Position6.4.92.6 Override Salary / Position Master File

6.4.93

6.4.94

6.4.95

6.4.96

6.4.97

6.4.98

6.4.99

6.4.100

6.4.101

6.4.102

6.4.103

6.4.104 Abiltiy to save reports and update with updated information as needed

6.4.1056.5 Project Accounting

6.5.1

6.5.2

6.5.3

Ability for position budgeting to allow for calculation of Step / Grade increases.

Ability to indicate out-of-balance conditions with corrections defined by the user.

Ability for multi-level budget approvals (Department, Finance, City Mgr and Board of Commission) for establishing budgets, line item transfers, budget adjustments are accommodated on-line, based on user security level.

Ability for the system to report changes in the document that occur from one authorization point to another by producing an audit "change trail" and what operator made each particular change.

Ability to group account numbers for internal and external reporting purposes, including category levels.

Ability to modify planned budget for an account and automatically update department and fund totals with appropriate amendment or council approval.

Ability to report actual revenue and expenditures against approved annual and allotted budget during the year.

Ability to allow online status inquiry for department to retrieve up-to-date detail account status, including revenues, expenditures and encumbrances.

Ability to allow organizations to define the number of budget levels needed and name them.

Ability to provide access to GL inquiry from the online budget worksheets.

Ability to allow users to define their budget reports by choosing information from the last five years adopted, amended and actual figures; the software must support user-defined budget levels or projections for up to five years in the future.

Ability to prohibit multiple users from updating the same record simultaneously.

Provides complete integration with the General Ledger at the transaction level (with single transaction entry) so that accounts in both systems remain in balance at all times.

Ability to provide complete job and project accounting capabilities for internal and grant funded projects across fiscal years.

Ability to maintain historical data for all capital and operating projects across multiple fiscal years.

6.5.4

6.5.5

6.5.6

6.5.7

6.5.8

6.5.9

6.5.106.5.11 Ability to enter text or comments on-line to a specific project.

6.5.12

6.5.13

6.5.146.5.15 Ability to tie expenditures to their funding source and vice versa.6.5.16 Ability to establish project budgets across funds.

6.5.17

6.5.186.5.18.1 Funding source and year of funding6.5.18.2 Sub-Project6.5.18.3 Other location quantifiers (related to fixed assets?)6.5.18.4 Asset6.5.18.5 GPS identifier and / or relational locational coordinates

6.5.19

6.5.20

6.5.21

6.5.22

6.5.236.5.24 Ability to accommodate a variety of projects such as:6.5.24.1 Small capital expenses (e.g., remodeling)

6.5.24.2

Ability to do real-time inquiry and reporting across mulitiple fiscal years.

Ability to provide flexible budgeting and forecasting capability for fiscal year, future fiscal year and the project as a whole.

Ability to roll project numbers into multiple years. (If the project isn't designated 'final' it rolls into future year.)

Ability to provide a user-definable project account number. Provide any limitations on the length in the Comments column.

Ability to customize workflow options for all project accounting processes.

Ability to track non-financial data (e.g., project manager, contractor information, project status, project phases, correspondence and percentage of completion).

Ability to add projects and change projects to an active or inactive status.

Ability to accommodate multiple change orders and multiple transfers of funds within projects.

Ability to maintain data across multiple fiscal years for as long as the project is open and for a user specified period after project close.

Ability to allow multiple departments to enter information on a project under security constraints that would be established at a transaction level.

Ability to provide chart of accounts validation for all project transactions.

System provides the following work breakdown structure for all projects:

Ability to associate multiple funding sources with projects and track the application of funding to expenditure detail.

Ability to establish project accounts to record project budgets and expenditures.

Ability to clone project accounts established from previous projects, then modify for a newly created project.

Ability to calculate capitalized interest by project, using methods as defined by user.

Ability to record project activity over multiple years and across multiple departments.

Large capital projects / acquisitions (e.g., buildings, infrastructure, fire truck)

6.5.24.36.5.24.4 Routine work order(s) for non-capital expenditures6.5.25 Ability to classify the project by:6.5.25.1 Type of project (paving, building, etc.)6.5.25.2 Location (enterprise zone, geographical area, etc.)6.5.25.3 Administering department

6.5.25.4

6.5.26 Ability to associate more than one identifying number to each project.

6.5.27

6.5.28

6.5.29

6.5.30

6.5.31

6.5.32

6.5.33

6.5.34

6.5.35

6.5.36

6.5.37

6.5.38

6.5.39

6.5.40

6.5.41

6.5.42

Miscellaneous programs, such as elections and software implementations

User defined category indicating CAFR or GASB 34 categories (Public Works, Public Safety, Parks)

Ability to track multiple dates including planned start date, actual start date, approval date, phases start and end date, project completion date, date of project close and other user defined dates (transition or handover dates).

Ability to associate projects with other projects in a hierarchical structure.

Ability to classify project costs according to task (i.e., inspection, design).

Ability to prevent charges from being allocated to a closed project, sub-project or phase with the ability to override with the proper security.

Ability to maintain multiple types of project completions / status. For example, project may be complete from a performance viewpoint but still open for accounting purposes.

Ability to validate charges against project master files to determine if charges are to open projects and accounts charged are valid for specified projects.

Ability to prevent project close if there is anything outstanding (e.g., contract, purchase order, etc.).

Ability to search project titles on-line, primarily to assist in proper identification for data entry, by address, roll number or other user-defined criteria.

Ability to allow allocating an amount by entered percentages to various projects.

Ability to make overhead / indirect cost allocations to projects, including the use of multiple, flexible overhead rates.

Ability to perform flexible budgeting for projects while adhering to the level of budgetary controls established in the General Ledger.

Ability to reflect funds that are redirected from and to another project through a budget amendment.

Ability to track multiple contracts to a single project or track a single contract across multiple projects.

Ability to close and reopen contracts, including capital projects, across fiscal years.

Ability to support various contract periods, including multiple year contracts (i.e., those that span fiscal and / or calendar years).

Ability to maintain a real-time transaction listing of all contract change orders including date and source.

6.5.43 Ability to accommodate change orders that have no financial impact.6.5.44 Ability to track retainage in separate accounts.6.5.45 Ability to budget only a portion of a contract based on fiscal year.

6.5.46

6.5.47

6.5.48

6.5.49

6.5.50

6.5.516.5.52 Ability to provide on-line access to actual & budgeted cost

6.5.53

6.5.546.6 Cash Receipts / Accounts Receivable / Misc. Billing

6.6.16.6.2 Ability to maintain a master customer file.

6.6.3 Ability to establish default account distributions for each receivable.

6.6.46.6.5 Ability to capture expenditure data for billing purposes.6.6.6 Ability to recognize or accommodate:6.6.6.1 Revenue earned and billed

6.6.6.26.6.6.3 Deferred revenue

6.6.6.4

6.6.6.5

6.6.6.6

6.6.7

6.6.8

Ability to trigger a notification upon substantial completion that specified user has a user specified number of days to release the holdback.

Ability to alert specified users and / or management when costs exceed contract award (plus net change orders).

Ability to track and flag contract expiration / extension dates for such things as insurance contracts and performance bonds.

Ability to accumulate, track and report on costs by any element in the chart of accounts.

Ability to control project funds according to department-specific needs (e.g., phase budget).

Ability to record timesheet, journal entries, invoices, purchase order and inventory information against a project.

Ability to maintain, track and accumulate actual costs and combine these actual costs with user calculated or user-input costs (e.g., estimates).

Ability to automatically update fixed asset module if project results in a fixed asset.

Ability to provide full invoicing, receivables tracking, collections and reporting functionality.

Ability to accept various receivables through different hardware means like OCR, Barcode scanning, Image capture, FTP File downloads, etc..

Revenue earned, but not yet billed based on meter reading for utility billing

Recognize revenue previously reported as deferred, based on time or events or user defined criteria.

Projecting cash flow of receipts based on historical data by accounts receivable type

Sorting and displaying accounts receivable in a prescribed aging format

Ability to electronically notify user-specified user of the receipt of EFT, by type of revenue.

Ability to enter a cash receipt transaction on a decentralized (departmental) or centralized basis with proper controls and authorization for audit trail.

6.6.9

6.6.10

6.6.11 Ability to establish an interface with bank(s) to track daily receipts.

6.6.12

6.6.13

6.6.14

6.6.15

6.6.166.6.17 Ability to generate miscellaneous bills at any time.

6.6.18 Ability to calculate the penalty date on a bill based on the billing date.

6.6.19

6.6.20

6.6.21

6.6.22

6.6.23

6.6.24

6.6.25

6.6.26

6.6.276.6.28 Ability to create and view adjustments pending on an account.

Ability to process positive or negative billing adjustments with proper controls and an audit trail.

Ability to distribute cash receipt deposits out to the department level and have information accessible on a real-time basis.

Ability to apply partial payments or overpayments against individual line items on a receivable.

Ability to generate a variance report by user or by department for list of receipts for daily cash deposits, cash receipts registers or journals and daily bank deposits

Ability to produce ready-to-mail invoices, statements and delinquent notices in the format required by various departments.

Ability to allow for interest, penalty, cash, receivable and bad debt accounts to be established by invoice type.

Ability to process customer / debtor invoices, cash receipts, debit / credit memos and customer / debtor account adjustments, which must be simultaneously updated in the appropriate master file(s); for example, license fees, fines, miscellaneous payments, etc.

The system tracks each transaction, by terminal and can provide a detailed payment transaction report.

As bills are paid and fees are collected, the system will update each of the other application modules by indicating if paid-in-full or if partial payment remains.

Allows customer inquiries by account name; account number; and invoice number, amount due or any other invoice or customer field.

Allows the user to customize any correspondence to be mailed, such as Late Payment notices and bills.

Allows the user to specify due dates for bills, based on type of bill or billing frequency, such as 30 days from the printing or mailing date or other user-defined criteria.

Ability to create and track installment billings that span a multi-year time frame.

Ability to provide a menu of receivable types for quick accessing when accepting payments over-the-counter.

Ability to process payments over the Internet for the following services: permits, inspection fees, business licenses and miscellaneous receipts.

Ability to close registers at the end of the day to a holding area until they are later approved and posted. Detail information is posted to the G / L with detail receipt information posted to the individual modules.

6.6.29

6.6.30

6.6.316.6.32 Ability to support lock-box processing.6.6.33 Ability to manage deposits to multiple banks and accounts.6.6.34 Ability to maintain comments at a receipt level.

6.6.35

6.6.36

6.6.37

6.6.386.6.39 Ability of imaging checks and associated attachments.

6.6.406.6.41 Ability to change prices, account numbers, fields,

6.6.42

6.6.436.6.44 Ability to balance cash drawers at any point in time.

6.6.456.6.46 Ability to customize detailed customer receipts6.6.47 Ability to post receipts to multiple outstanding bills.

6.6.48 Ability to calculate amount of change due back from amount tendered.

6.6.496.6.50 Ability to reprint cash receipt.

6.6.51

6.6.526.6.52.1 Customer number6.6.52.2 Balance forward or open items6.6.52.3 Contact name(s)6.6.52.4 Address by type (i.e., remittance, bill to, parent company, etc.)6.6.52.5 Current and unpaid late payment penalty and interest charges

Ability to specify the order in which receipts are processed against outstanding receivables with the option of overriding the order. This would include outstanding receivables across all modules.

Ability to display the cashier on the receipt when having multiple registers open on the same cash drawer.

Ability to have multiple sessions operating on the same terminal at the same time.

When receiving payments from a customer provide the ability to display various status flags on the account (e.g., customer notes, NSF status, etc.).

Electronic workflow routing cash receipt information to the Treasurer and the Controller.

Ability to provide workflow processing for approvals, review and modification.

Ability of the system to distinguish among cash, check or credit card payment and to provide separate totals at days end to assist in balancing the drawer.

Ability to provide user-friendly prompts or menus to guide cashier through transaction.

Fully integrated with the Accounts Receivable and General Ledger systems.

Ability to use Optical Character Recognition (OCR) or laser bar code readers for scanning receipted bills.

Ability to endorse / validate multiple checks, bills and documents within a single transaction.

Ability to search on historical cash receipts by any field captured within the receipt.

Ability for scanned bills to automatically retrieve account information including amount owed. User only has to "key in" amount paid, if different from amount owed.

Ability to maintain and track the following data elements for each customer record:

6.6.52.6 Balance due6.6.52.7 Year-to-date payments

6.6.52.8 Average number of days to pay and payment delivery method used.6.6.52.9 Bad check, dunning, and / or bankruptcy information

6.6.52.10 Customer classification (e.g., quarterly billing, monthly billing, etc.)6.6.52.11 Statement cycle (e.g., weekly, monthly)6.6.52.12 Notes / comments (miscellaneous additional information)6.6.52.13 Other user-defined fields

6.6.53

6.6.54

6.6.55

6.6.56

6.6.57

6.6.58

6.6.596.6.60 Ability to identify a protested charge on an invoice.6.6.61 Ability to classify customers by user-defined classifications.

6.6.62

6.6.63

6.6.64

6.6.65

6.6.66

6.6.67

6.6.68

6.6.69

Ability for user to review a customer's billing / transaction history at a summary level and be able to scan down the screen and select a bill or transaction item to view in detail.

Ability to maintain billing history, including the following: bill number, status, type, amount due, date charged / due / paid, adjustments, customer information and other user-defined fields.

Ability to retain and display seven years of billing and collection history on-line.

Ability to restrict access to add, delete or modify customer information by individual user or by user group through appropriate system security and with detailed audit trail.

Ability to prevent deletion of customer records that meet specific user-defined criteria (e.g., outstanding balance) or that have any activity in a user-defined period.

Ability to automatically assign sequential customer and invoice numbers to ensure duplicates do not occur.

Ability to archive inactive accounts based on user defined criteria and based upon appropriate user security privileges.

Ability to generate tickler messages for automatic display on specific dates for follow-up with a customer.

Ability to activate or deactivate customers, within a user-defined period, based on period of inactivity and appropriate user security privileges.

Ability to provide option of billing by type of charge and / or type of customer.

Ability to accommodate payment plans with the appropriate workflow approval process.

Ability to develop payment plan rules based on type of offense, type of receivable or other user defined criteria, with the appropriate security.

Ability to allow customers to review their accounts online with the appropriate security.

Ability to see all liens and outstanding receivables on a customer account.

Ability to apply customer deposits to an invoice and generate the proper GL transactions

6.6.70

6.6.71

6.6.72

6.6.73 Ability to create different templates for invoices for different purposes.6.6.74 Ability to provide sequentially numbered invoices.

6.6.756.6.76 Ability to generate invoices for the next fiscal year.6.6.77 Ability to image and attach related electronic documents.6.6.78 Ability to split invoices between multiple funds.

6.6.79

6.6.80

6.6.81

6.6.826.6.83 Ability to generate account statements by user defined fields

6.6.84

6.6.85

6.6.86 Ability to prevent interest on specific invoices or on specific customers.6.6.87 Ability to maintain detail of unbilled charges.6.6.88 Ability to exclude / include billing detail data elements

6.6.89

6.6.90

6.6.91

6.6.926.6.93 Ability to identify duplicate or reprinted invoices as such.

6.6.94

6.6.95

Allows one bill to be generated for each customer with all open receivables included.

Allows adjustments to account balances for checks returned with insufficient funds.

Allows generation of notices for mailing to customers when a check with insufficient funds is received.

Ability to provide automatic booking of accounts receivable as a by-product of customer invoicing.

Ability for a cash receipt to be distributed to multiple revenue accounts based on a user defined (e.g., percentage or flat amount) allocation.

Ability to generate one invoice or many invoices for users who owe more than one department.

Ability to maintain and send invoices to multiple addresses for the same customer.

Ability to construct and process periodic statements for every receivable by user-specified criteria.

Ability to generate consolidated statements with various invoices from the same customer and apply it automatically when amount received by user-defined criteria.

Ability to automatically calculate interest on individual account from an effective dated interest table and bill customer for interest and principal.

Ability to produce reconciliation statements showing beginning balance, charges, credits and payments and a new balance.

Ability to print bar coded information on remittance advice in either batch process or single bill print.

Ability to identify a range of customer accounts within a department, fund, cycle

Ability to correct and reprint invoices, with the appropriate security and audit trail.

Ability to accommodate online cancellation and one step automatic reversals of invoice entries.

Ability to print individual customer statements on demand and / or automatically print all customer statements during a desired cycle.

6.6.966.6.97 Ability to allow credit memos, with appropriate security.6.6.98 Ability to post pre-payments.

6.6.99

6.6.100 Ability to print standardized comment on certain customer classes.

6.6.101

6.6.102

6.6.103

6.6.1046.6.105 Ability to include the billing date range and / or period on invoices.

6.6.106

6.6.1076.6.107.1 Manual selection of items to pay

6.6.107.2 Step-through outstanding items, allowing user to select specific items.

6.6.1086.6.109 Ability to generate a cash receipt on demand.

6.6.1106.6.111 Ability to identify payment source.

6.6.112

6.6.113

6.6.114

6.6.115

6.6.116

6.6.1176.6.118 Ability to accommodate ACH debits against customer accounts.

Ability to suppress statements for specific customers or entire classes of customers.

Ability to apply specific credit memos to specific invoices and invoice line items.

Ability to print comments on both an individual and group basis on the billing documents.

Ability to write-off discrepancies between the amount due and the amount received, with the appropriate workflow approval

Ability to make payment against a receivable, especially in the case of interagency funds, generated through the accounts payable module.

Ability to provide flexible means by which to calculate and include various taxes on invoices.

Ability to provide security to let individual users be restricted to certain invoice types.

Ability to apply revenue to multiple accounts using one of the following methods:

Ability to accommodate receipts via electronic funds transfers (EFT), lock box, credit card and other electronic receipts for payment.

Ability to accommodate multiple payments for an invoice and direct payment portion to appropriate general ledger account.

Ability to upload specific bank payment items to subsystem and / or general ledger as payment is made through third parties, banks, etc. i.e. Medavante, US Bank

Ability to accept all possible cash register outputs and variables including reason codes for reporting purposes.

Ability to record, process and interface to AR all cash register payments (walk-up counter in City Hall)

Ability to accommodate single payments applied against multiple invoices and direct payment portion to appropriate general ledger account.

Ability to accommodate payments in excess of or less than the bill rendered.

Ability to optionally carry a credit balance or automatically generate a refund (through the A / P process) resulting from a customer overpayment.

6.6.1196.6.119.1 Amount6.6.119.2 Transaction / Receipt Number6.6.119.3 Transaction Type6.6.119.4 Customer Name6.6.119.5 Customer ID or account number6.6.119.6 Customer address6.6.119.7 Account Receipted6.6.119.8 Date of service6.6.119.9 Current date and time6.6.119.10 User processing the payment6.6.119.11 Cash register location6.6.119.12 Department

6.6.119.136.6.119.14 Amount of taxes included in payment, split out by type6.6.119.15 Tender type6.6.119.16 Description of service (text and / or code)

6.6.119.17 Other fields as defined by policies and procedures and Internal Audit

6.6.1206.6.121 Ability to maintain a log of all receipts with control totals.

6.6.122

6.6.1236.6.124 Ability to automatically number receipts sequentially.

6.6.1256.6.126 Ability to put more than one item on a receipt.

6.6.127

6.6.128

6.6.1296.6.130 Ability to process uncollectible accounts as follows:6.6.130.1 Mail letter to customer.6.6.130.2 Record as uncollectible.

6.6.130.3

Ability to track, search and report on the following information on cash receipts:

An unlimited number of forms of payment (e.g., check, cash, credit, debit).

Ability to determine which fields are required for entry upon cash receipt, by department.

Ability to designate certain fields as required on the receipt and require valid data elements in those fields.

Ability to track revenue received without a corresponding receivable needing to be created.

Ability to pull up an existing cash receipt entry and reverse it, with the appropriate accounting effect automatically by the appropriate authority level and audit conditions are in place.

Ability to display an account number for each separate entry on a receipt.

Ability to provide aging analysis of outstanding accounts receivable on any grouping of user defined periods, using the original invoice date and current system date.

Ability to generate delinquency notices (based on user-defined delinquency periods) in user-defined batches or as real time transactions, with appropriate automated work flow approval, based on receivable type.

Reverse amount deemed uncollectible and record receipt of cash if received at anytime.

6.6.130.4

6.6.131

6.6.132

6.6.133 Ability to generate late payment fees (i.e., 2% of outstanding amount).

6.6.134

6.6.135

6.6.1366.6.137 Automatically generate a receipt number in the cash register6.6.138 Ability to have generous description capability on an invoice

6.6.139

6.6.1406.6.141 Abillity to transfer amounts betwwen accounts for utiltity billing6.7 Asset Management / Fixed Assets

6.7.1

6.7.2

6.7.36.7.4 Fixed Asset system has robust query ability with wildcards

6.7.5

6.7.6

6.7.7

6.7.8

6.7.9

6.7.10

Obtain proper approvals to write-off account balance if not collected, with proper security.

Ability to accommodate various write-off capabilities based on user-defined bad debt policies.

Ability to automatically generate delinquency notices to other agencies for collection, placement of liens, etc. based on non-payment processing rules.

Ability to automatically calculate interest or penalty charges and apply them to the delinquent accounts, by type of bill and by length of delinquency period.

Ability to request an invoice generation with appropriate approval and interface to AR

Provide cash register with ability to set up defined coding based on type of receipt

Ability to appropriately display charges and related description together on an invoice

Ability to differentiate active and inactive customers. Display only one group.

Ability to track “non-capitalized" asset / equipment items (i.e.: computer equipment, non-licensed vehicles) per department / division for risk management purposes.

Ability to distinguish highly attractive and employee-issued items from fixed assets for reporting purposes.

Ability to track non-depreciable inventory items (desktops, laptops, etc) including detailed information such as component detail, serial numbers, technical specifications, etc.

Ability to export / import information to / from common spreadsheet applications

Ability to support bar coded asset tags and portable bar code readers for performing physical inventories.

Ability to manually assign asset tags, if necessary and generate the bar code.

Ability to reprint bar coded asset tags, if necessary, with the appropriate audit trail.

Ability for system to list and value infrastructure capital assets (streets, piping, water mains, etc.)

Ability to depreciate capital assets and allocates depreciation to those programs that use the assets

6.7.11

6.7.12

6.7.136.7.14 Ability to accommodate alpha numeric asset numbers.

6.7.156.7.16 Ability to reassign parent / child relationships.6.7.17 Ability to capitalized items in aggregate (as a group)6.7.18 Ability to perform partial disposals / retirements

6.7.196.7.20 Ability for a project to be associated with multiple assets6.7.21 Ability for an asset to be associated with multiple projects

6.7.22

6.7.23

6.7.246.7.24.1 ID Number Changes6.7.24.2 Location Changes6.7.24.3 Account Number Changes6.7.24.4 Status change6.7.24.5 Partial disposals6.7.24.6 Valuation change6.7.24.7 Date of Last Depreciation Adjustment

6.7.25

6.7.26

6.7.26.1 Expected Useful Life (years, months, hours, mileage, cycles, etc.)6.7.26.2 Date of Expected Replacement6.7.26.3 Current Asset Value6.7.26.4 Anticipated Asset Value at Time of Replacement

6.7.27

6.7.28

Ability to interface with the Accounts Payable modules. Information on newly obtained fixed assets is reported for verification, then automatically transferred from the A / P module into the Fixed Assets master file system. Users are able to adjust and or remove assets that are misclassified.

Ability to provide a classification scheme to code fixed assets according to type (i.e., desks, cars, etc.).

Ability to accommodate free-form descriptive text to further describe any asset.

Ability to accommodate parent / child relationships between related assets, such as a master unit with one or more accessories.

Ability to interface with the Project Accounting system to capture project costs for aggregate / project assets

Ability to associate multiple capital accounts and multiple related depreciation expense accounts with an asset and assign a percentage split between each

Allows for transfer of assets between departments, locations and funds, accommodating interfund and inter-dept. transfers, duplicating all identifying data from original record.

Ability to maintain an on-line history of asset transactions, including:

Ability to calculate asset values to replacement costs for insurance purposes.

Ability to record and report on asset replacement information, such as:

Ability to allow the useful life of an asset to change, with an audit trail of all changes.

Retention of fully depreciated assets in fixed asset master file for inventory control purposes prior to disposition.

6.7.296.7.29.1 Fund / Account Group6.7.29.2 Fund Type6.7.29.3 User defined customized fields, for example function codes6.7.29.4 Property Type6.7.29.5 Building6.7.29.6 Location6.7.29.7 Department6.7.29.8 Program6.7.29.9 Acquisition Date6.7.29.10 Original Cost6.7.29.11 Current Value6.7.29.12 Status (active, disposed, idle, etc.)6.7.29.13 Previous asset number6.7.29.14 Document Reference Number6.7.29.15 Acquisition method (purchased, donated, etc.)6.7.29.16 Depreciation, Life-to-Date6.7.29.17 Depreciation, Year-to-Date6.7.29.18 Parent / Child Descriptions and Asset Numbers6.7.29.19 Purchase Order Number6.7.29.20 ID or Tag Number6.7.29.21 Vendor Name and ID Number

6.7.29.22 Multiple Description lines (brand, model and manufacturer of asset)6.7.29.23 Check Number and Date6.7.29.24 Serial Number6.7.29.25 License Number6.7.29.26 Replacement Cost6.7.30 Ability to idle assets (suspend depreciation)

6.7.31 Ability to enter an unlimited amount of user-defined asset categories.6.7.32 Ability to utilize asset subcategories.

6.7.33

6.7.34

6.7.35

6.7.366.7.37 Ability to write-off assets upon disposals.6.7.38 Ability to create a depreciation projection report

6.7.39

Maintains on-line master file information on each asset, including fields that can be identified as optional or required:

Ability to specify the location of an asset including address, building, room number, department and individual with possession

Ability to image the warranty, bid or other associated electronic documents and attach to the asset record.

Ability for accounts payable module to automatically trigger fixed asset entry process according to user-defined criteria (e.g., price, account number and user-defined commodity code table).

Ability to trace or locate an item by any defined field including: asset number, bar code number, project number, fund, location and other user-defined fields.

Trade -in process create automatic entry and applies it to the new asset

6.7.406.7.41 Ability to run deprecition on a single asset6.8 Utility Billing

6.8.1

6.8.26.8.3 Ability to invoice customers by email

6.8.46.8.5 Ability to add, view, delete new accounts

6.8.6 Ability for new account set-up to default to a standard / model set-up6.8.7 Ability to tie customer accounts to meter(s) issued

6.8.86.8.9 Ability to support multiple meters per customer

6.8.10

6.8.11

6.8.12

6.8.13 Ability to house both current and previous owner / tennant information

6.8.14

6.8.15

6.8.16 Automatically send overrides / exceptions to supervisor for approval

6.8.17

6.8.18

6.8.19 Ability to house and apply tiered rate tables for each separate utility 6.8.20 Abilty to send file to invoice printing vendor

6.8.21

6.8.22

6.8.236.8.24 Ability to add service and administrative fees

Flexible report writer that can report on fixed asset addition, deletions, etc, by various user chosed fields

Ability for customers (residential, commercial) to view and pay utility bills online and request a change to account information

Ability for customers (residential, commercial) to set up ACH payment on-line, view reading and billing history including graphs, view payment history, inserts / forms

Ability to track amounts due by customer utility (sewer, water, storm, capital and other)

Ability to automatically generate a letter to residents for various notificaitons

Ability to track account by property owner and / or tennant / resident for both resdential and commercial accounts

Ability to generate ub work orders based on manual input and automatically email work orders to repair personnel to create work order list

Ability to receive and send information to meter reader hand held systems

Ability to house text notes associated with a customer account (for example to document complaint or billing dispute)

Abilty for UB clerk to manually calculate and override consumption information to customer account

Ability for supervisor to approve or reverse manual exceptions requested by UB clerk.

Ability to house table of standard or custom messages (up to 1500 characters) to be printed on customers' utility bills

Ability to flag delinquent accounts with over a certain amount due and so many days in arrears

Ability to flag accounts as being in the process of going to special assessment

Ability to flag accounts as 'pending levy' and add a levy / fee to next billing cycle

6.8.25 Ability to move the account into the Special Assessment system status6.8.26 Ability to share utility billing information with the County

6.8.276.8.28 Ability to process automatic bill payment / ACH files6.8.29 Ability to process locked box bill payments

6.8.30

6.8.31

6.8.32

6.8.33

6.8.346.8.35 Ability to create new accounts and attach new PIDs

6.8.36 Ability to add and activate hydrants and tie to commercial accounts6.8.37 Ability to carry forward balances for overpaid bills

6.8.386.8.39 Calculate Conservation Surcharge6.8.40 Sewer consumption based off of winter use6.8.41 Estimate final read of move out / closing6.8.42 balance stays with the service address on a move out6.8.43 Interface with the general ledger system6.8.44 Apply payment to oldest balance first

6.8.45

6.8.466.8.47 Ability to automatically penalize on date criteria6.8.48 Ability to generate bills based on minimum rate table6.8.49 Ability to calculate cost based on rate table plus other factors6.8.50 Ability to generate a report by zip code for a certain bill group

6.8.516.9 Work Orders

6.9.1

6.9.2

6.9.3

Ability to automatically email or mail customers when account is past due

Ability to record, process and interface to AR all cash register payments (walk-up counter in City Hall)

Ability to generate exception report listing 'NSF' check customers and generate delinquent payment letters to customers

Ability to track meter problems / receive problem info via handheld, manual clerk input or online customer input

Ability to generate repair list based on types of problems reported, geography

Ability to process Laser mail merge notifying resident to call the City to schedule repair

Ability to process manual clerk override to trigger refund check for overpaid accounts

Ability to generate exception reports based on user defined criteria (utility billing)

Ability to interface with asset management software for utilities infrastructures

Ability to generate report with the following criteria; consumption, dwelling units, classification,dollar amount by services (ie water, sewer, etc.)

Ability to provide a fully integrated module specifically for work order management.

Ability for a job to define a series of tasks, materials, charges, etc. for that job, with scheduled dates

Ability for the Preventative Maintenance function to generate work orders

6.9.4

6.9.5

6.9.6

6.9.76.9.8 Each work order includes:

6.9.8.16.9.8.2 Date & Time of Request6.9.8.3 Requestor6.9.8.4 Multiple Contact names & information6.9.8.5 Complaint or problem description6.9.8.6 Department Name6.9.8.7 Type (Public Works, Facilities, Maintenance, Roads, etc.)6.9.8.8 Category Code (type of work requested)6.9.8.9 Task codes (specific tasks completed to correct problem)6.9.8.10 Status (Open, Completed, Past Due, etc…)6.9.8.11 Account Number(s)6.9.8.12 Project Number, Name & Type6.9.8.13 Estimated Time and Materials Required

6.9.8.14 Actual Time and Materials Required (units, unit of measure, unit price)6.9.8.15 Location of Work, Facility ID and / or Name6.9.8.16 Asset Number & Description6.9.8.17 Employees Performing Work 6.9.8.18 Hours and Rates Incurred by Employee (regular / OT)

6.9.8.196.9.8.20 Time Start / Stop6.9.8.21 Cost of Services and Materials Used6.9.8.22 Comments6.9.8.23 Emergency (Y / N)6.9.8.24 Priority6.9.8.25 Multiple user-defined fields based on category code selected6.9.9 Ability to print out work order form for technician or for field use.

6.9.10

6.9.11

6.9.12

6.9.13

6.9.14

Ability to bill an external organization for a work order, by integrating to the billing module

Ability to maintain multiple forms with different data fields, based on type of work code.

Ability to interface with an electronic mail / calendaring system to properly schedule and assign work orders.

Allows work orders to be automatically or manually scheduled by the supervisor and re-scheduled as necessary.

Unique work order number with the ability to link with other reference numbers.

Multiple Dates including Required Completion Date, Date Started, Date Completed

Ability to use a portable PC in the field to update and log field activities directly into the work orders.

Allows multiple work orders for same job / project. Tracks each work order number for cumulative reporting purposes.

Ability to incorporate all work orders into a work schedule for the supervisor based upon time required and location of work.

Ability to produce scheduled work orders weekly, monthly and annually for facilities.

Ability to generate a work activity list for one or more work orders. (i.e. “to do” list based upon active work orders.)

6.9.15

6.9.16

6.9.17

6.9.18

6.9.19

6.9.20

6.9.21

6.9.226.9.23 Ability to accept service requests from the Internet

6.9.24

6.9.25

6.9.26

6.9.276.9.28 Ability to generate work orders without a service request.

6.9.29

6.9.30 Ability to create work orders with multiple predefined tasks / steps.6.9.31 Ability for work orders to display and print special instructions.

6.9.326.9.33 Ability to assign work order to one person or multiple people.

6.9.34

6.9.356.9.36 Ability to create approval process prior to close of work order.

6.9.37

Ability to sort, display and print work orders by a variety of parameters such as location, crew, priority, etc.

Ability to project costs incurred by job, project and program based on history of similar jobs, projects and programs.

Allows for the application of costs to accounts / projects for reporting of material purchases, machine-usage, labor rates and benefits and contractor fees.

Ability to send automated notifications to the requesting department via electronic methods of changes in the work order status.

Ability to notify requestor when work has been completed through automated notification.

Ability to generate template-based notification documents based upon work order type, type of work requested or status of work order to be sent to either internal or external users.

Ability to maintain an audit trail of entries and changes to status codes, responders, dates, locations, etc.

Ability to accommodate service order request generated by departments, citizens or system generated preventative maintenance

Ability to generate multiple work orders from one service request and maintain tracking of the original service requests.

Ability to limit self-service requests to drop-down menu of options, rather than free-form entry.

Ability to create and default information into the work order from the service request.

Ability for staff to compare the current incoming service requests to others already in the database by geographic area, type code, requester or date.

Ability for multiple, unique preventative maintenance schedules to be established for infrastructure, facilities or pieces of equipment based on user-defined criteria.

Ability to track and / or query work orders by any of the elements on the work order.

Ability to track all dates throughout the work order life cycle (e.g., date received, date scheduled, date started, etc.).

Ability to record date and time, changes made and the user who made changes to any work order.

Ability to prioritize work orders based on user defined parameters or assignments.

6.9.38

6.9.39

6.9.40 Ability to modify existing work orders by adding tasks or new work.

6.9.41

6.9.42

6.9.43

6.9.44

6.9.45

6.9.46

6.9.47

6.9.48

6.9.49

6.9.50

6.9.51

6.9.52

6.9.53

6.9.54

6.9.556.9.56 Ability to track multiple contacts for each facility.

6.9.57

6.9.58

6.9.596.10 Permits & Inspections

Ability to create master work orders with associated sub-work orders (e.g., renovation project work order is made up of destruction, construction, electrical, plumbing, etc.) and provide an obvious cross-reference.

Ability to generate automatic form letters or electronic notification to notify specified users when preventative maintenance is due.

Ability to automatically create a bill when billable work order is completed.

Ability to see an overview of all scheduled work for all technicians from the Master Schedule.

Ability to archive and / or purge closed or cancelled work orders based on user-defined criteria.

Ability to compile and sort technician information, including special skills and available work hours.

Ability to set up and schedule seasonal preventive maintenance activities.

Ability to indicate preventive maintenance work orders that are delinquent.

Ability to issue advance reminders automatically when specified preventive maintenance activities are near due.

Ability to store manufacturer’s recommendations for preventive maintenance scheduling work and materials needed.

Automatically generate and print preventative maintenance work orders by end-user specified cycle (daily, weekly, monthly)

Ability to re-calculate preventive maintenance labor hour estimates based on task history of actual hours.

Ability to create a master list of scheduled preventive maintenance activities due in a selected period.

Ability to move scheduled preventive maintenance when downtime or outages present performance opportunities.

Ability to make global changes to preventive maintenance schedules and work orders.

Ability to track facility inventory including facility name, facility type, description, address, area, year built, a special instructions field for user specified comments and miscellaneous fields for user specified data.

Ability to track history of maintenance activities and costs related to facilities or equipment.

Ability to individually charge time to a work order to the task or activity level of detail.

Ability for time spent on certain activities or in certain jobs to automatically default from work order assigned or position.

Ability to estimate budget amounts of projects by using standard costing for personnel, equipment, materials and contract resources.

6.10.1

6.10.2 Data must reside in the central CIS database with UB, Misc AR, etc.6.10.3 System must be real time processing, not batch processing.6.10.4 Application provides system of generating forms and certificates.

6.10.5

6.10.6

6.10.7

6.10.8

6.10.9

6.10.10

6.10.116.10.12 Provides fields for tracking surety amounts and reductions.

6.10.13 Automatically verify permit expiration dates via look up and reports.6.10.14 Any type of permit (mostly construction permits) is allowed.

6.10.15

6.10.16

6.10.17

6.10.18

The system provides for any type permit to be established and tracked through the plan review, contractor approval, pricing, fee collections, inspections and CO process.(including on line permit process and inspections tracking for customers)

Application provides method of creating standard and custom inspection forms / reports.

System provides for additional addresses, cross-referenced, changed, merged and subdivided addresses and retains applicable history and information.(including multiple PID's with a single address and multiple addresses and a single PID)

Application captures and allows access to complete permit histories including inspection results by address, parcel #, permit # or geographic location.

Maintain contractor information including employees, work types, contacts, email address, bond, payment info, licenses held and insurance information.(license and registration numbers and contractor ID number)

From the contractor file, easily drill down to the permit detail of any of the permits the contractor is working on, as well as lookup of permit history by contractor.

The system should interpret operator entry to automatically recognize recurring customer / contractor information.

Automatically verify contractor expiration dates in system when permit is associated with a particular contractor.

Each type of permit must have it’s own set of review, inspection, notes / comments, fee and workflow processing.

The system is configurable through tables that control inspections and plan reviews for each type of permit and format of the permit(s), inspectors, inspection dates, notes / comments, inspection areas, fees and charges.

The application provides method to add “red flags” or holds to applications or addresses that have not met certain planning and engineering requirements preventing further action until user-defined requirements are met.

The application provides for automatic communication at user defined intervals for activities relative to the department's or utility's workflow (i.e.: e-mail or alerts). Notifications can be designated for individuals or groups.

6.10.196.10.20 Track zones and zoning information (including setbacks)

6.10.21

6.10.22

6.10.23

6.10.24

6.10.25

6.10.26

6.10.276.10.28 The system should have scheduled inspection approval steps.

6.10.29

6.10.30

6.10.31

6.10.32

Fees are automatically calculated based upon user defined rule tables. Fees may be based upon square footage, valuation, fixtures or any other parameters described within the ordinances of the jurisdiction. Fees can also be defined based on individual subdivisions.

The system should provide Soundex (“sounds like”) name searches for owner and contractor information.

The system should provide rule-based architecture which allows user control of fee structures, plan reviews, inspection, workflow and other processing as policies and requirements of the jurisdiction change over time.

The system provides for flexible scheduling and management of inspections for permits, plan reviews and construction activities, occupational licenses and fire / safety facilities, including fields for notes.

One screen for inspectors to access all of their open inspections and corresponding permits and pertinent information regarding that inspection with the ability to utilize dropdown menus to record inspection comments and results.

Inspector assignments are allowed on receipt or through an intelligent online assignment function taking into consideration disciplines, areas, workload and other parameters with optional user intervention (with correct security level) to override assignments as needed.(GIS location of inspections would assist with inspector routing?)

Inspection sequencing, control and rescheduling must be allowed through user defined rules with online supervisor access.

The system automatically displays available inspectors by area and discipline for an inspection based on their schedule.

Re-inspection fees are automatically assessed and may control subsequent inspections or activities based upon contractor credit status with override capabilities via authorized user as needed.

The application provides a method to add unlimited graphics, reports, free-form notes and other custom fields to permit applications or address records. These attachments can be flagged to appear automatically at key processing points.

The system allows for building plans and applications to be reviewed and submitted online with space for notes, standard comments, hyperlinks, tools for identifying and highlighting items and approval / disapproval from affected departments.

The system uses an industry standard object relational data base with ODBC connectivity. The database is capable of being distributed across multiple processors / servers and must provide an optional link to ESRI ARC-Info.

6.10.33

6.10.34

6.10.35

6.10.36

6.10.37

6.10.38

6.10.39

6.10.406.10.41 Interface in real time with field inspectors laptops / handhelds6.11 General Requirements6.11.1 Technology

6.11.1.1

6.11.1.2

6.11.1.3

6.11.1.4

6.11.1.5

6.11.1.6

The system provides a standard data link for the import / synchronization of external property and ownership records from GIS, Property appraiser (LOGIS PDS), Tax collector, Realty and other sources of information.

The system provides financial reports and interfaces to the accounting system.

Can print aging report for any date, past or present. Can also provide reports by type of unit or by square footage of use (commercial / industrial).

Ability to provide on-screen look ups and reports sorted by impact fee per type / subdivision.

Permit listing based on application date, completion date, expiration date, paid date, print date, last inspection and issue date.

The software provides integrated export / import capabilities to third party applications (financials, GIS, Document Imaging Systems).

The system allows for customer self-service capabilities via an internet-based, self-service application that would provide city residents and agencies with 24 / 7 convenience of applying and issuing permits (with online payment), permit status tracking, setup and scheduling of inspections and online view of inspection results. Please include as optional pricing unless it is part of the base package.

The system operates with a variety of interactive voice and electronic response systems allowing contractors and other customers to schedule inspections for ongoing permits, obtain automated status and other information without direct staff intervention.

The software must comply with all State and Federal laws related to government entities and provide a means to reduce costs and burdens of compliance by serving as a basis for satisfying standardized reporting and auditing requirements.

The software must comply with financial accounting and reporting standards set forth in the "Government Auditing and Financial Reporting" (GAAFR).

The system must be GASB 34 compliant and adhere to GAAP standards.

Ability to provide an easy method to inquire real-time account balances at any time.

Ability to support accounting process functions that are required to maintain various fund types, individual funds and account groups, such as special revenue funds, fiduciary funds, etc.

Ability to provide a complete system of true fund and encumbrance accounting supported by open purchase order tracking.

6.11.1.7

6.11.1.8

6.11.1.96.11.1.10 Ability to leverage Microsoft Office technology

6.11.1.116.11.1.12 Ability to utilize MS servers in a VMware environment.6.11.1.13 Ability to use Microsoft’s SQL 2005 or 2008 database. 6.11.1.14 Ability to support Windows XP clients.6.11.1.15 Timeframe for Windows 7 support?

6.11.1.16

6.11.1.17

6.11.1.186.11.1.19 Ability to support email as an output option.6.11.1.20 Ability to provide program source code on-site or in escrow

6.11.1.21

6.11.1.22

6.11.1.23

6.11.1.24

6.11.1.25

6.11.1.26

6.11.1.27

Ability to process financial information using either modified, full accrual or cash basis of accounting based on the type of fund. Make sure cash reporting and cash receipts is covered in reporting or other section then delete.

Ability to specify all major system variables, e.g., chart of accounts, report definition and processing parameters, through system administration-maintainable tables. (Provide flexibility to manage major system variables). For example, define businss unit and how many characters, object, etc.

Ability to support task alerts; when a user logs in, the system should automatically display the responsibilities, such as report approvals, budgeting, P.O. approval, etc., that need attention for the day, week, month, based on user-defined preferences. (Staff would not sign on regularly but would be helpful to have e-mail reminders)

System must operate on Microsoft Server 2003 or 2008 operating system.

Ability to support Web server running Microsoft IIS. Please provide any other types of servers supported in the Comments column.

Ability to utilize the City's existing email Exchange Server 2007 and / or 2010

Ability to accommodate remote Intranet and Internet access while maintaining strict security of data.

Ability for all suites / modules / applications of the solution to be fully integrated to maximize operator and system efficiency. Specifically, updating of any data element occurs only once and is then reflected throughout all applications.

Ability to provide totally integrated search capabilities on all fields without the use of a secondary application.

Ability to input, access and store a user-defined level of historical data "on-line". For individual employees and City. Where else is this addressed in the RFP?

Ability to verify the validity of the data being entered into the database by performing immediate error checking and ensuring that system balances are maintained.

Ability to have control of data entry to ensure user enters data into all required fields on the screen.

Ability to direct output of a data search to a printer upon user demand or Microsoft application.

All applications are capable of 100% integration between product suites and individual application.

6.11.1.28

6.11.1.29

6.11.1.30

6.11.1.31

6.11.1.32

6.11.1.33

6.11.1.34

6.11.1.35

6.11.1.36

6.11.1.37

6.11.1.38

6.11.1.39

6.11.1.40

6.11.1.41

Ability to have complete and total drill down capabilities from all summary information to detailed source code across all applications.

Ability for vendor to provide ongoing software maintenance and new software releases periodically to meet all State and Federal requirements at no additional charge other than the annual maintenance cost.

Ability for vendor to supply various utilities to facilitate file maintenance, data manipulation and backup / recovery.

Ability for all vendor supplied software to be accompanied by sufficient documentation to enable comprehensive understanding of its internal structure and operating procedures.

Ability for Release Notes to be supplied that document changes between version releases. These documents must be written in a fashion that is easily understandable by the end user. The format of the Release Notes must be contusive to analyzing which changes affect the City.

Ability for software to comply with accessibility standards. To comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Information technology must be accessible to people with disabilities. And the information technology's accessibility level must comply with accessibility standards set forth in Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act. Section 508 requires that Federal agencies' electronic and information technology is accessible to people with disabilities (Does this apply?)

Ability to support a single customer identification number across all applications but be able to pull and bill by separate applications if we want to.

Ability for all informational data elements tracked to be maintained in an ODBC-compliant integrated database to allow efficient data sharing, customized report writing and automated posting.

Ability to provide a data import / export facility which permits transferring data from other data files into the database and exporting data outside of the system. [NOTE TO VENDOR: Please include addendum to outline how this works in your system]

Ability to support a web front-end that allows for both mouse pointer navigation and keyboard / shortcut navigation.

Ability to support nine-character zip codes and international alphanumeric zip codes.

Ability to import master City / State / ZIP file from a 3rd party (US Post Office) and validates addresses with the system against it. Also defaults City and State, if ZIP is entered.

Ability to maintain separate components for an address record including: house number, direction, street name, unit, city, state and zip code.

Ability to provide “Auto fill” functionality that fills in field level information (i.e. – vendor name, account name) Based on data base.

6.11.1.42

6.11.1.43

6.11.1.44

6.11.1.45

6.11.1.46

6.11.1.47

6.11.1.48

6.11.1.49

6.11.1.50

6.11.1.51 Ability to utilize field / record locking as opposed to page / file locking.

6.11.1.52

6.11.1.53

6.11.1.54

6.11.1.55

6.11.1.56

6.11.1.57

6.11.1.58

Ability to have data entry fields automatically default to a specific value (e.g., date fields should default to current date).

Ability for system inquiry screens that offer filtering ability to search based on any known value.

Ability to not change field names when system upgrades / new release are developed. This enables custom reports to be retained with little or no maintenance by the City

Ability for application software modules to interface with a digital imaging system to allow for attachment of digital images to records and transactions - Integrate with SIRE, attachments for A / R, Journal Entry Support, Cash receipts support, includes supporting documentation for all systems

Ability to support OCR or bar code scanning and ability to print OCR & bar codes.

Ability to interface with Word, EXCEL and Access for downloading and uploading information for unique data manipulation purposes.

Ability for the communications environment to be capable of supporting interactive file maintenance, inquiry and ad hoc reporting without a significant decrease in user response time or an increase in system CPU utilization. Network monitoring data should be readily available from the system console.

Ability for all transaction processing including file maintenance and transaction entry to be handled in an on-line, real time processing mode or batch entry mode as determined by the user.

Ability for back-ups or other transactions in one module to not block, delay or otherwise interfere with transactions in other modules.

Ability for all application modules to incorporate a method for adding, changing and deleting data records on-line in real time. All related data fields are automatically updated. Batch purging of inactive records and / or transaction history is accommodated.

Ability for system to interact with the relational database and offer robust querying and online analysis tools which do not require programming knowledge, allowing users to pick and choose fields, link tables and establish criteria

Ability to have consistent use of command keys and screen layouts across all components.

Ability for software to be menu-driven with comprehensive utility and "help" screen capabilities.

Ability to provide context-sensitive help screens based on user's application privileges and where they are in the application

Ability for vendor to provide utilities that are able to be configured by a system administrator and scheduled for unattended execution.

Ability to provide an archiving solution for all data elements which provide configuration options for archiving schedules

6.11.1.59

6.11.1.60

6.11.1.61

6.11.1.62

6.11.1.63

6.11.1.64

6.11.1.65

6.11.1.66

6.11.1.67

6.11.1.68

6.11.1.69 Ability to open multiple screens / windows / sessions concurrently.

6.11.1.70

6.11.1.71 Ability to perform partial queries and "wildcard" functionality in fields.

6.11.1.72 Ability to utilize effective dates (past and future) for all transactions.

6.11.1.73

6.11.1.74

Ability for system architecture to be designed for distributed processing, placing control of applications in user departments.

Ability for system design to deliver application functionality in an integrated, but modular format, such that software application modules can be implemented in a phased approach.

Ability to provide a user-configurable 'management dashboard' which allows users to identify and view key summary performance statistics from various components of the ERP systems and drill into them for further detail

Ability to permit simultaneous data base accesses, permitting simultaneous access to files and queuing update requests at the record or field level when field contention prevents simultaneous updates. In addition, it must permit concurrent processing of batch and on-line jobs accessing and updating the same data files and data base while maintaining desired performance levels.

Ability to include a powerful set of administrative tools to monitor utilization, trace database access chains, database reorganization, problem determination and resolution, optimize schema and sub-schema definitions, model, report areas / pages percent full and to optimize file placement and layout.

Ability to include an active integrated central data dictionary. This dictionary should be an integral component of the data access capabilities, including the definition of both data attributes and values. The system should be user friendly and understandable.

Ability to support rules for maintaining entity integrity (only one row in a table for each unique primary key) and referential integrity (validating the existence of foreign keys).

Ability to support multiple environments. Capability to establish a test and training environment (same server).

Ability to support electronic signatures and digital certificates. Specify preferred encryption methodology and key management methodology.

Ability to access other input screens and modules without backing out of menus or menu paths.

Ability to utilize on-line drop-down lists of all valid values for each validated field.

Ability for all transactional data to have time, date, user id, created and modified by stamps for report design, security administration, application upgrade administration, archiving & purging of data.

Ability to provide keystrokes for rapid data entry and movement from screen to screen ("hotkeys" or coding reduction techniques).

6.11.1.75

6.11.1.76

6.11.1.776.11.1.78 Ability to highlight required elements upon transaction entry..

6.11.1.796.11.2 Workflow

6.11.2.1

6.11.2.26.11.2.3 Ability to provide a flexible, hierarchical approval process.

6.11.2.4

6.11.2.5

6.11.2.6

6.11.2.7

6.11.2.8

6.11.2.9

6.11.2.10

6.11.2.11

6.11.2.12

6.11.2.13

6.11.2.14

6.11.2.156.11.3 Audit

6.11.3.16.11.3.1.1 Type of change6.11.3.1.2 User Name6.11.3.1.3 Effective Date of Change

Ability for end user screens to contain triggers to additional data screens based on specific data input.

Ability to allow mass changes or deletes by table-driven data with proper security, approvals and audit trails.

Ability to provide descriptive error messages which are understandable to non-technical users.

Ability to determine which employees are utilizing the system at any point in time, with appropriate security control.

Ability to provide workflow functionality throughout all suites / modules / applications to automate business processes.

Ability for Workflow rules can be based upon triggers, financial rules and user-defined parameters, appropriate roles, rules & routing.

Ability to assign secondary approval (e.g., vacation or duplicate approval capabilities).

Ability to track and report electronic approvals. Provides ability for bi-directional approval, e.g. to start with the supervisor and be routed to the employees.

Ability to set number of approvals required by type of transaction or threshold such as dollar value.

Ability to automatically re-route transactions if an individual does not act within a specified timeframe.

Ability to provide notifications to parties involved in workflow chain when escalation is needed.

Ability to allow individuals with higher levels of authority to approve transactions that have not been approved by individuals with lower levels of authority.

Ability to track and report on every aspect of the electronic approvals (e.g., supervisor did not approve but department head approved).

Ability for workflow transaction records to contain a comment field for text entry or for file attachments.

Ability to send out broadcast messages to notify of certain events and the ability to specify the receivers of broadcast messages.

Ability to utilize bulletin board functionality to display broadcast messages upon entry into the system.

Ability to utilize existing email network to send workflow notifications. (Exchange 2005)

Ability for necessary forms or documents to be routed to users and / or supervisors for completion upon user-defined events.

Ability to provide an automated audit trail of system transactions that includes:

6.11.3.1.4 Date6.11.3.1.5 Time6.11.3.1.6 Old value / New value6.11.3.1.7 Transaction Type6.11.3.1.8 Transaction ID

6.11.3.2

6.11.3.3

6.11.3.46.11.4 Security

6.11.4.1

6.11.4.2

6.11.4.3

6.11.4.4 Ability to support required password changes on a user-defined basis.6.11.4.5 Ability to support alpha / numeric / special character passwords.

6.11.4.6

6.11.4.7 Ability for data import / export to be subject to application security.

6.11.4.8

6.11.4.9

6.11.4.10

6.11.4.11

6.11.4.126.11.4.13 Ability to report on unused or inactive user ids.

6.11.4.146.11.4.15 Ability to limit the types of transactions that a user can process.

6.11.4.166.11.4.17 Ability to support decentralized security administration.6.11.4.18 Ability to support set-up of security by groups or classes.

Ability to provide a method for archival, as defined by system administrator.

Ability to query transactions from an internal or external audit perspective for unusual activity. e.g.. Duplicate payments or query high dollar or unusual transactions.

Ability to produce a daily audit trail by field (field changed from / to) for all master file changes, by user.

Ability to include an on-line fully robust security system that can be managed by the municipality without programming required.

Ability for application security to provide flexible access control down to the field level; allowing specific access permissions such as update, view-only or prohibit-view.

Ability to authenticate with Active Directory to support enterprise single sign on.

Ability for the system to automatically establish passwords and manage forgotten passwords, within user-defined protocols.

Ability for Ad Hoc / Query / Reporting to be subject to application security.

Ability to support suspension of user ID after user-defined number of failed login attempts (i.e., requires system administrator to reset password).

Ability to prevent users from using old password as the new password at time of forced change.

Ability to support automatic logoff (timeout) when system is left unused for a user-defined period of time.

Ability to provide report of failed login attempts and unauthorized attempts.

Ability to restrict access to data fields and windows to users with proper security.

Ability to support a minimum of 128 bit data encryption, for data being sent out from or received by the City via the Intranet or Internet. Specify preferred encryption methodology / management.

6.11.4.196.11.5 Reporting

6.11.5.1

6.11.5.26.11.5.3 Ability to do mail merging to generate mailing lists and labels

6.11.5.4

6.11.5.56.11.5.6 Ability to calculate percentages and averages6.11.5.7 Ability to specify desired subtotal breaks and totaling fields

6.11.5.86.11.5.9 Ability to provide various statistical procedures (> <,etc.)

6.11.5.10

6.11.5.11 Ability to set up menus of created reports for easy access and printing6.11.5.12 Ability to send report to the screen, a printer or to a file.

6.11.5.13

6.11.5.14

6.11.5.15

6.11.5.16

6.11.5.17

6.11.5.18

6.11.5.19

6.11.5.20

Ability to establish flexible security matrix which will support a combination of authorizations for a user that has multiple security profiles incorporating various security levels (e.g., transaction level security, organizational level security, project / grant level security, funding level security, data element security and workflow level security).

Ability to include a Custom Report Writer with file organization structure consistent between all application modules. [NOTE TO VENDOR: Please include addendum to outline how this works in your system]

Ability to generate ad hoc queries and reports based on user-defined parameters. Ad-hoc queries can access any fields within the system per security authorization.

Ability to retrieve information from multiple files and report across multiple years on the same report

Ability to obtain reports in different sort sequences [NOTE TO VENDOR: Please include addendum to outline how this works in your system]

Ability to search, sort and retrieve records from any number of specified data fields, in any number of files

Ability to prepare / print reports from any accounting period and across periods.

Ability to select any account or range of accounts in the chart of accounts for inclusion in reports or exclusion

Ability to provide "Wildcard" and / or “Keyword” capability to allow easy accessing of a range of values when creating reports

Ability to select any department or range(s) of departments for inclusion or exclusion in / from reports

Ability to provide on-line graphics, capabilities are provided for presentations of trends, percentage breakdowns, comparisons of data groupings, etc.

Ability to provide an easy to use system for preparing various statistical and analytical reports.

Ability to reprint reports, checks or bills with restart capability when reports, checks or bills being printed are interrupted.

Ability to print all reports to laser printers (in either portrait or landscape format)

Ability to support multiple page sizes (8.5”*11”, 8.5”*14”, Green-bar) based on the format of each specific report.

6.11.5.216.11.5.22 Ability to completely view / scroll through reports on-line / screen.6.11.5.23 Ability to print multiple copies of reports at one time.6.11.5.24 Ability to spool print files and reprint as required.6.11.5.25 Ability to print screen contents (format and data) of each display.

6.11.5.266.11.5.27 Ability to save a query and / or report

6.11.5.28

6.11.5.29

Ability to print Accounts Payable checks to laser printers with signatures and MICR coding (with appropriate security measures in place). I don't think we need MICR coding, verify what it is?

Ability to drill up or down to supporting documents and related transactions from any field within the system.

Ability to export to and import from popular desktop word processing, spreadsheet, report writer (e.g.. Crystal reports) and business intelligence applications within individual data access rights and security privileges.

Ability for users to tailor system provided reports; retaining application level security and performance.

MOD 3RD CST FUT NS Description

account payable (A / P)

Module Name in Schedule 1 or 4

General ledger keeps centralized charts of accounts and corporate financial balances. It supports all aspects of the business accounting process. In this module, financial accounting transactions are posted, processed, summarized and reported. It maintains a complete audit trail of transactions and enables individual business units to view their financial information, while parent companies can roll up all business subsidiaries and view the consolidated information.

Multiple calendars may be useful for different accounting scenarios. For example, different financial entities may need separate fiscal calendars--one set of books might require a quarterly calendar while another would require a different term. If a merger results in two financial entities that have different fiscal calendars, the accounting system will need to maintain both calendars and normalize the data (Q2 for Entity A is equal to Q3 for Entity B). This may also be useful for what-if scenarios.

A financial reporting entity is a business unit which can legally make financial reports.

The 4-4-5 calendar period uses a four week, four week, five week pattern. Likewise, the 5-4-4 calendar period uses a five week, four week, four week pattern; and analagously for the 4-5-4 pattern.

The calendar can be organized in a limitless form, with up to 999 user periods, per calendar

The ability to decide how to organize data when defining the organization of an enterprise's financial information

Allows for instant processing or batch processing

general ledger (G / L)

By controlling when an account is open and closed, the posting of information in an account period can restricted.

The ability to change the currency used in balance sheet accounts to another currency using a default rate. It is possible to override this default rate for particular accounts. Moreover, it is possible to set different default rates for different subledgers.

This would be part of the year end procedures for offsetting accounts. It can be used in determining, for example, year end sales amounts. This criterion would be considered in relation to whether or not data from the previous year should be kept.

A general ledger key typically is an identifier attached to accounts to put the accounts into groups. For example, there may be fifteen accounts in the chart of accounts related to payroll and all fifteen accounts will be assigned the same key (perhaps "PAYROLL"). Thus the system can purge or set other rules to all chart of accounts with the same key.

The ability to cumulatively incorporate results from the previous accounting period into the current accounting period, but only when the last document generated in the previous period was the financial statement.

The ability to cumulatively incorporate results from the previous accounting period into the current accounting period, but only when the last document generated in the previous period was the financial statement.

General ledgers are designed to present values for creating financial statements. The multiple level for a ledger key means the system will have a more complex and functional key structure--one that supports a hierarchy of keys.

The ability to automatically, rather than manually, identify open receivables exceptions by using user-defined conditions (for example, very large amount invoices, exceeding credit line, etc.)

ADP refers to automatic data processing.

This refers to accessing individual parts of the customer attributes

The system can provide a copy function or a program to propagate a chart of accounts for a specific existing business unit to a new business unit. If a US dollar ledger has a chart of accounts, a Canadian dollar ledger can be created by propagating from the US dollar ledger, etc.

For future expenses that have not been received. Upon invoice receipt, differences are posted to a particular G / L account.

This is different from a purge because the balance still exists but has been moved to another account. This allows for the automatic aging of account balances from a current file to a prior file and is required to maintain separate balances relating to customers acquired in the current year and in prior years

The ability to process jobs that are in the midst of being edited or updated

The ability to create a report subsection that indicates which pages of the report mention errors and warnings

The ability to decide if a particular job should be updated more than once during a given time period

The ability to look up entries in the ledger by company, by market and by stock keeping unit (SKU)

The ability to define variables within a tabular array of data so that jobs are performed and postings or reports are created accordingly

This refers to enterprise resource planning (ERP) database tables, not, for example, report tables.

The ability check data entry to make sure that only the correct records are updated

The chart of accounts is a list of ledger account names and account numbers, creating consistency in terminology and eliminates redundant accounts. A chart of accounts structure should include fields for account and ledger descriptions, to prevent shadow accounts from being created. Data tree tools allow users to see the structure of the fields and summaries, to help with reporting requirements, foster change, etc.

Given ledgers and sub-ledgers may share a chart of accounts.

Some companies may even need a lengthier history

Some examples include headcount or quantity of sold unitsCost centers entities such as departments

Users can suppress account numbers in order to use only necessary numbers or characters.

A common chart of accounts lets an organization integrate its data within financial and cost accounting systems, whether or not the data are included internally or externally. A common chart of accounts helps drive consistency of reported information, in addition to decreasing the reconciliation and consolidation procedures. Using a common chart of accounts is a method of ensuring compatibility across business units.

Logical numbering refers to, e.g., date-related number assignment (as opposed to strictly sequential numbering).

Option to stipulate that accounts may not be created until at least one transaction is posted.

Standard, subtotal, statistical, volume and memo are standard types of accounts.

This ability enables finding a balance for a customer within the G / L hierarchy

Full account numbers may be derived from alphanumeric key codes. This enables quick entry of account number data.

Fields and segments can be created to represent areas required by a report structure such as a country, region, division, fund, product line, etc.

Sub-accounts result when a large account is broken into smaller accounts. They are used to better track detailed budgets and expenses and to create reports. For example, when a department could have sub-accounts for each of its project leaders.

Multi-entity may refer to multiple companies

Named by the start of the calendar year or the end of the fiscal yearCost centers are an organization's smallest units for reporting

The system checks the validity of standard accounts.

The chart of accounts is a list of ledger account names and account numbers, creating consistency in terminology and eliminates redundant accounts. A chart of accounts structure should include fields for account and ledger descriptions, to prevent shadow accounts from being created. Data tree tools allow users to see the structure of the fields and summaries, to help with reporting requirements, foster change, etc.

Flexfields are a set of fields that are configured to hold information. They can be customizable and be as small as three fields or longer.

Account titles indicate in whose name the account is held. Narrative accounts are qualitative descriptions of financial developments or transactions.

Should include tax, financial statements, as well as internal reporting and current cost reporting

Base currency is the currency that is used in accounting books.

Assigned books refer to the set of accounting records for a specific business entity.

Accounts and groups may be subtotaled regardless of their numerical sequence.

Even though revenue and cost information is posted to the general ledger in summary (consolidated), the system will maintain within the sub-ledgers revenue and cost information at the item (SKU) level.

The ability to use preset or calculated variables to change where information is stored in the general ledger and subledgers

A processing job is when a computer analyzes a load of data and performs calculations using it. Thus, this criterion refers to the ability of the system to deal with more than one set of data and to perform more than one set of calculations at one time.

The ability to work on-line with general accounting, budgeting, purchasing, vendor payment, etc. systems even when closing jobs are being run

The chart of accounts is a list of ledger account names and account numbers, creating consistency in terminology and eliminates redundant accounts. A chart of accounts structure should include fields for account and ledger descriptions, to prevent shadow accounts from being created. Data tree tools allow users to see the structure of the fields and summaries, to help with reporting requirements, foster change, etc. Account mapping is the process of associating names with accounts, indicating their position in the overall accounting hierarchy, etc.

For example, if one unit reaches a certain percent of revenues, it might be elevated to a higher level.

Journal entries can accommodate user comments or notes.

System provides flexible views for consolidated financial data, including all hierarchical and business segment permutations.

The accounting department is typically responsible for recording all transactions in the company in the journal (GL). All of the criteria that fall Journal Entry and Reporting relate to various ways to record journal transactions. For example payroll is an AP item. As paychecks are cut the AP items need to be reconciled with the cash outflow. A software feature might be the automatic reconciliation of payroll deductions when paychecks are issued (as opposed to having an accountant have to key the transactions by hand).

Specify a journal entry as the G / L's template for repeating every period

Reversing entries in a journal is a way to track accruals and deferrals. It is the opposite of an adjusting entry.

A batch total is the sum of a field used as a control, to ensure all applicable data has been entered. Batch checking detects and reports standard deviations.

The ability to shift transactions from one reporting period to another with security. For example, if one were to post a receivable in Q2 that should have been posted in Q3, this functionality would allow the receivable to be shifted to the right period by someone with the appropriate access rights.

This refers to changing the year-to-date (YTD) information. It should automatically update changes in accounts that reflect the YTD calculation

To designate your choice of time frames for credit and debit balances.

general ledger (G / L)

A journal voucher (JV) is a document that authorizes payment for services performed or for goods that are received or exchanged. As a means to record ledger transactions, JVs may have different approvals for different accounts. For example when someone submits an expense report that money is typically associated with an account on the chart of accounts in the G / L. The account may require a JV for posted entries. The JV may include copies of receipts and a sign off from a manager before the entry can be posted.

For account balance consistency, the credit or debit is posted based on double-entry bookkeeping.

Intercompany eliminations are deductions that occur when balance sheets and income statements are consolidated.

Transactional consolidations, whether they occur and what point they should occur, are determined by the user

Users can use tables to define calculations and postings for jobs that occur monthly.

Check digits are used with a mathematical formula for the sake of discerning recording errors. A check digit is a digit added to the numbers of a coding system.

general ledger (G / L)

purchase order (PO)

Fixed assets manages depreciation and other costs associated with tangible assets such as buildings, property and equipment. The software should support the following functionality: fixed assets records; asset transactions; asset depreciation; depreciation books; revaluation and interest calculation; and tax reporting.

Intangible assets, also known as non-physical assets, include patents, copyrights, leaseholds, etc.

Journal entries are made as required when canceling asset retirements

Insurance requirements may make it necessary to record asset appraisal values.

general ledger (G / L)

fixed assets (F / A)fixed assets (F / A); accounts payable (A / P)

A short tax year is a tax period that is less than twelve months.

Adjusted current earnings (ACE) reports for non-updateable assets

Refers to the ability to input and record assets that are charged during one period and not depreciated.

A depreciation reserve is a business fund which contains the yearly depreciation cost of equipment. This creates a reserve which can be used to replace the equipment when its completely obsolete. Tax depreciation is a yearly deduction for the use of property.

Deferred depreciation is the ability to postpone depreciation. It is the difference between the asset's depreciation expense as listed between a tax book and its associated corporate book.

electronic funds transfer (EFT)

Internal Revenue Service (IRS) is a US Treasury Department that is responsible for tax collection and tax programs.

Different jurisdictions will calculate real property taxes differently; however, generally speaking, real property tax is based on the value of real property. Real property is land that includes buildings, fixtures, plumbing, etc. Like real property, the definition of personal property depends on the jurisdiction. Essentially, it can be tangible or intangible items that fall outside of the definition of real property.

Accounts payable schedules bill payments to suppliers and distributors and keeps accurate information about owed money, due dates and available discounts. It provides functionality and integration to other areas such as customer service, purchasing, inventory and manufacturing control. The software should support the following functionality: AP company policies and procedures; suppliers / voucher master data; payment controls; invoice processing and aging analysis; payment processing; journal voucher processing; AP ledger posting; check processing; AP transactions and controls; and AP reporting.

Accrual basis accounting requires expense matching and posting transactions to the ledger regardless of whether an invoice has been received or not. Using this method, revenue is recognized in the period in which it was earned.

purchase order (PO)

purchase orders (PO)

The ability to record the time period that is normally extended on credit sales before payment is due and to make mass changes to this time period

A data entry screen dedicated to a specific vendor in the case that the vendor has a high volume of activity

Accounts payable (A / P); users can modify invoice information fields from within the A / P system.

Payment can be scheduled if purchase order matches received goods (no invoice required).

Users can increase or accumulate over time invoices and receivers that have not been vouchered yet or recorded as a transaction.

Although most transactions with a specific vendor or customer may be subject to sales and use tax, users have the ability to override the standard tax rates or even tax liability when entering a specific invoice that may be tax exempt or subject to a different tax rate.

voucher process

purchase order (PO)

Suspends an invoice to cancel a payment

general ledger (G / L)general ledger (G / L)general ledger (G / L); accounts payable (A / P)

Users have the ability to assign specific exchange rates to a specific invoice rather than the system assigning the exchange rate that would normally be utilized.

Standard method of accounting where some types of revenue may be recorded before being received

general ledger (G / L)

accounts payable (A / P); general ledger (G / L)

general ledger (G / L)

electronic data interchange (EDI)

Compares cost savings from client discounts to the interest received from bank deposits.

Rather than specify a single payment discount (2%10days), users can specify a complex payment discount that is dependent on how long it takes the users to pay.

Discount amounts can be overridden and a new amount added.

purchase order (PO)

electronic funds transfer (EFT)

A skeleton voucher is one that contains basic or recurring information, regularly input in a voucher

electronic funds transfer (EFT)

Users can create a report that lists all sales and user tax liabilities for a time period, along with the invoices already claimed. This would apply if an invoice had been received after the sales and use tax calculation had already been calculated for a specific time period.

The ability to show the length of time since financial transactions occurred on vendors' accounts

The ability to show the length of time since financial transactions occurred on vendors' accounts, in conjunction with the vendor's payment history for the year to date (YTD)

The ability to prepare statements showing the expenses, advances and the balance due by the employee

accounts receivable (A / R); general ledger (G / L)

accounts receivable (A / R)

Accounts receivable tracks payments due to a company from its customers. It contains tools to control and expedite the receipt of money from the entry of a sales order to posting payments received. The software should support the following functionality: AR company policies and procedures; customers / voucher master data; bill processing and aging analysis; credit management; cash / payment application, receipt processing; journal voucher processing; AR ledger posting; multicurrency accounting and conversions; AR transactions and controls; and AR reporting.

If a batch does not balance, it will not be posted by the system, but will be held in suspense until the errors have been corrected.

Individual transactions can be entered and posted immediately rather than being posted as part of a batch. In fact these individual transactions are still a batch containing a single transaction.

accounts receivable (A / R)

When inventory cannot support the demand requirements for a given item, the client's order cannot be filled and is a back order. During A / R processing sales orders need to be determined delivered or not since back orders may be billed in advance.

Adjustments can be tied to individual plants by utilizing a specific code field.

Different fields that might be used, for more granular reporting, etc. Identification (ID); independent solutions provider (ISP)

Users can be restricted such that they cannot change tax rates or liabilities as an invoice is entered. In other cases users cannot enter transactions above specified dollar totals.

accounts receivable (A / R)

accounts receivable (A / R); day sales outstanding (DSO)

A write-off is an allowable reduction in an asset's value.

The ability to create reports with one line per customer showing how long bills have been on that customer's account

Users can create and print draft invoices that are saved in history but not posted to the general ledger (G / L). These invoices eventually can become "real" and posted to the G / L.

electronic funds transfer (EFT)

Cash management involves the capability of the system to record cash charges or deposits, recording of cash payments and receipts, cash projection reporting, calculation of expected cash uses / sources, current cash availability, etc. It monitors and analyz

Unless otherwise handled by the above systems, ERP needs to allow payments to be processed by a variety of means.

Incorporates all organization cash accounts -- operating, lock box, disbursement, concentration, etc. -- into one report including balance, target balance and details of each account.

accounts receivable (A / R)

accounts payable (A / P)

Automatically recorded cleared checks against disbursement registers

Ability for the system to continuously check the funds committed (purchase orders, committed capital for private equity investment, etc.) against the cash sources to ensure that the funds available are not exceeded.

Supports updates or other revisions to the pay dates scheduled for a given project (for payroll)

The term cash book refers to the record of debits, credits and the balance. Receipts and payments are organized in categories (such as bank, year or statement).

Ability to support standard routing instructions for each private equity investment. Routing would include bank instructions and would ensure that directions correspond to the investment purpose.

Based on instructions in wire transfer / ACH request, online submission of wire transfer request.

Drop down menus for wire transfer posting based on standard instructions and corresponding general ledger (GL) account coding.

Notifies internal department staff or external managers of outgoing wire transfers.

This refers to reports that flag or otherwise call attention to statement discrepancies between bank reconciliation and bank statements.

Maintain suspense account for unprocessed cash transactions. Automate the notification of cash receipts and maintain control over timely clearing of transactions.

Provide online bank reconciliation that accepts bank data [see 1.5.15 and 1.5.17 above] downloads. The system should provide the ability to determine the status of any cash entry and provide control for all check numbers and wire transfer numbers.

Ability to prepare cash flow statements to meet external reporting requirements and cash flow projections to meet internal management needs.

Ability to schedule debt payments

Provide on-line interface with the lenders to receive invoices and debt service reports online, generate debt service summary reports, make online payments, process journal entries and accomplish electronic administrative approval

Ability to create cash transfer reports that incorporate bank balances with general ledger balances to determine amount of cash to transfer to bank accounts. Should also generate the journal entry once the electronic bank transfer is made.

Ability to maintain multiple petty cash accounts and to automate the process for periodic reimbursement of petty cash accounts including voucher submission and receipt imaging.

For example, users can determine if the check is outstanding, voided, cashed, etc.

Ability to flag certain payments such as state payments, tax receipts, etc. for review.

Include credit card, cash, check, refund, corrections, etc. by cashier on a daily basis

Reports available by date, account and transaction type for actual and forecasted cash balances

Electronically download bank statements for use in online reconciliation.

Project accounting uses financial practices to monitor the schedules and spending of projects.

The primary use of the project accounting module is to provide a "cradle to grave" system for larger projects (>$10,000) that supports the budgeting, forecasting, cost accumulation and cost analysis.

Note: Section 5.1.5.3 lists system requirements for forms creation. This section identifies system requirements for data fields with the assumption that standard contract forms, RFQs / RFIs and other documents related to the contracting process can be au

Interface directly with Fixed Asset module to add the cost of completed projects and designate the particular expected useful lives of the various components of each project.

Ability to interface directly with MS Project or other project management tools to provide single application ease-of-use.

Search capabilities to allow the researching of new or existing invoices by vendor or expenditure type to facilitate the identification of the project that relates to any invoice.

External documents such as contracts, invoices, bills of lading or other contractor or vendor provided documents can be scanned and linked to related the related contract, cost or payment as support. such as contracts, bills of lading and invoices for querying tools.

Ability to capture other data fields as determined by the user, including tax map key number, contractor identification numbers or other required data.

Allows the the development of reports by the status of projects and to maintain search capabilities for certain projects only, for example only active projects.

Allows the Project Managers to maintain daily diary of issues related to each project and to facilitate the communication of these issues for timely resolution.

For example, major repairsFor example, construction in progress

For example, IT infrastructure projects (ITIP) CAFR designations, funding source, infrastructure, interior remodel, equipment upgrade, cafeteria, athletic, residential, location or similar designations

The ability to apply extra, user-defined codes at any level of the cost coding structure in order to look at the cost breakdown in a new way

Statistical accounts track information, which is not of a financial nature.

If a user specifies an account number or item number in a journal entry, the system will automatically display the account or item description. Users then have the right to override that description.

Period intervals may be modified according to user requirements.

Retention is when a percentage of an invoice (either payables or receivables) is withheld until the job or project is finished. The system will accrue these retentions until in a special asset or liability account.

Budgeting involves budgetary controls, budget accounting, budget development and budget allocation. The software should provide sufficient tools to enable detailed budget development and analysis. Additional functionality should be available to integrate with project management software applications either natively or with external interfaces.

stock-keeping unit (SKU)stock-keeping unit (SKU)

Additional software is not required to read, print or save reports.

The ability to forecast different future costs and revenues based on different rates, standards, volumes and other user-specified factors

Capability of the system to allow the users to review, on-line, interactively, budget information as it is being loaded into the system

Projections can be changed manually or due to changes in the budget formula.

Provides complete budget information versus actual dollar activity as a comparison for analysis and status.

The ability to store historical budget information for at least two years

When the future forecast bucket is rolled into the current forecast, the forecast and budget do not change. The current forecast will change when replaced by the future forecast.

The ability to have a minimum number of what-if scenarios for budgeting and forecasting

The ability to have a minimum number of what-if scenarios for budgeting and forecasting

The ability to have a minimum number of what-if scenarios for budgeting and forecasting

Financial reporting enables robust analysis of company performance through delivered reports. These reports will allow individual business units to view their financial information, while parent companies can roll up all business subsidiaries and view the consolidated information. Additionally, solutions should provide user generated reporting tools that are easy to use and provide sufficient depth of and access to the financial data to permit comprehensive analysis.

year to date (YTD)

Enables individual business units to view their financial information, while parent companies can roll up all business subsidiaries and view the consolidated information.

Users can define a non-posting account that accumulates the total amount associated with the control break account. In this example users can define an account that accumulates all revenue or expenses that are associated with a specific department. These non-posting account totals can then be printed on a report.

Control breaks are like sub-totals. In this case the user can define multiple control break accounts and the system will automatically accumulate and print on a report the subtotals.

Control break accounts do not have to be accumulators. They can also be blank lines or underlines that will help users format a report.

Rather than accumulating and printing the accumulator sub-total at the end of the control break, users can specify that the sub-total is printed at the beginning of the account list.

Control break accounts do not have to be accumulators. They can also be blank lines or underlines or titles that will help users format a report.

general ledger (G / L)

A trial balance is a statement of accounts and their balances over a specified period.

Accounting information can be analyzed from different levels and view points. A summary trial balance report lists the general ledger (G / L) balances and activity for each account or for a group of accounts. A trial balance report presents specific information.

The report system is capable of adapting to the default reporting standards of underlying operating systems (e.g., Windows, Linux, etc.).

An exception report is a report that selects data based on specific parameters to identify process exceptions. Transaction exceptions should appear in standard reports.

The chart of accounts is a list of ledger account names and account numbers, creating consistency in terminology and eliminates redundant accounts.

Creates a report using standard out-of-the-box functionality where the metadata is located, rather than having a separate report writer in the accounting module.

general ledger (G / L)

Responsibility reporting is a single report that is used by multiple levels of management. It summarizes each area, giving managers an overview of developments applicable to their area.

Control reports are a type of auditing report used to monitor the type of financial transactions that occur throughout an entity.

Crossfoot is an accounting term, which refers to verifying a grand total by adding the sums of columns running across.

general ledger (G / L)

Customer Care and Billing (CC&B)

OOAD = object oriented analysis and design

UI = user interface

GUI = graphical user interface

Ensures the standardization of input and reduction of entry errors

ID = identity

CSR = customer service representative

ID = identity

CSR = customer service representative

CSR = customer service representative

CRM = customer relationship management

MML = human-machine language GUI = graphical user interface

CSR = customer service representative

This requirement refers to future collection of market information to analyze the customer behavior, attitude and churn.

Scripting = automatic pop-up boxes advising standard responses

DDI = direct dial-in

SMS = short message service

Customer profiling incorporates allowable hardware types, service provisions, tariffs and discounts

SMEs = small and medium enterprises

VIP = very important people

CC&B = customer care and billing

Assuming that the user treats different customers differently, eg, high usage customers are grouped together in a "Gold" group, medium in "Silver" and low in "Bronze", the requirement is to prioritize service requests from Gold customers, so that the request handling takes less time than for Silver or Bronze customers. The prioritization rules are defined based on the customer record.

Validation information could be information from previous invoices or specific information set by the customer, such as a PIN code. PIN = personal identification number

Includes items such as name and family name

This may include account information, discount plans, taxes, credit rating, current usage and calculated bills

CSR = customer service representative

CSRs = customer service representatives

CSR = customer service representativeCSR = control and status register

CSR = customer service representative ID = identity

CSR = customer service representative

NMS = network management system

ACD = automatic call distributor CTI = computer telephone integration CSR = customer service representative

SLA = service level agreement

SMS = short message system

OOAD = object oriented analysis and design

GUI = graphical user interface

SMS = short message service

CPU = central processing unit

CPU = central processing unit ECC = error detection and correction

RAID = redundant arrays of independent disksDLT = digital linear tapes

CC&B = customer care and billing

SAN = storage area network

G / L = general ledger

Charges could be per product, per service or per supplementary service.

Charges could be per product, per service or per supplementary service.

That is, the system should be able process more than one billing cycle on a given date.

This means that event records will not be added if the bill run is delayed some days.

WWW = World Wide Web WAP = wireless access protocol SMS = short message service GPRS = general packet radio service

CSO = customer service office

CSOs = customer service offices

IVR = interactive voice response

G / L = general ledger

UI = user interface

EBPP = electronic bill presentment and payment

Facilitate residential versus commercial billing formats

ACH = automated clearing house

PINs = personal identification numbers PUKs = personal unblocking keys

Such as web-based billing templates or software tools to modify the bill layout

Purchasing management encompasses a group of applications that controls purchasing of raw materials needed to build products and that manages inventory stocks. It also involves creating purchase orders / contracts, supplier tracking, goods receipt and payment and regulatory compliance analysis and reporting.

Triggered by supplier confirmation

For example, tax exempt certification, insurance expiration date

For example, those that span fiscal and / or calendar years

PO = purchase order

For stock transferred between warehouses

A buyer's workbench can refer to a set of tools available to a buyer to make a purchasing decision. For example, the buyer would have access to the profiles of different vendors, approved vendor lists and their catalogs, vendor scorecards, information on open blanket purchase orders, etc.

Parameters should include address, business line, buyer, country, item group, item, price list, region, type of order, vendor group, vendor and warehouse.

For example, FedEx, UPS, Airborne or DHL

Receipts for materials that go directly into stores

Feature ought to allow for explanations where applicable and support replacement shipment or credit requests.

This type of feature should not record these materials as available for production but should record them as being received.

Some sales require the seller to ship a specified quantity per time period. For example 600 items at 50 items per week.

Can multiple individual purchase releases against a blanket order / contract be captured at the level of line items (as opposed to the entire order header)?

A blanket PO covers long-term commitments for material from a supplier. Near-term release requirements are generated as needed.

Such as address or contact name

For example, NutriKids

A / R aging analysis helps credit managers determine the current status of A / R accounts, collection schedules and to forecast cash inflows on a monthly, quarterly and annual basis.

Fraud detection management gives detailed analysis of physical assets, computing depreciation and useful lives of assets.

Indicative and real cash flow analysis provides insight on the viability and ongoing concern of the business.

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (often shortened to SOX) is legislation enacted in response to the high-profile Enron and WorldCom financial scandals. It is designed to protect shareholders and the general public from accounting errors and fraudulent practices in the enterprise. The act is administered by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), which sets deadlines for compliance and publishes rules on requirements.

Multiple tab inserts provide the ability to insert into more than one table with a single SQL statement

Table functions eliminate the need to stage data into physical objects during complex data transformation.

Point-and-click graphics tool give users a complete look at the data from every possible angle.

The ability to make copies of master files, fields and structures

Architecture refers to the framework for organizing the planning and implementation of data resources. It also refers to the way the system is designed and how the components are all connected to one another.

Data integration technologies pertain to hardware and software integration.

Data management options pertain to hardware and software integration.

This term describes the database architecture of the proposed business system. From table relations handled as fourth normal form to first normal form.

Relational database management systems (RDBMS) are a type of database management systems (DBMS) that store data in the form of related tables.

Gateways are interfaces that convert protocols in order to connect different networks.

Metadata are data about data. They describe how, when and by whom a particular set of data was collected and how these data are formatted.

The ability to include all information in the database, no matter what format it is stored in

This pertains to the IT department's system support of the application.

This pertains to the IT department's system support of the application.

This pertains to the IT department's system support of the application.

Database field names and types

These refer to tools for programmers.

This pertains to database design for business analysis.

A way to store and share data from multiple databases according to its relationships with other data

To enable batch and automated data transfer between the system and other applications which may be in operation, the data fields must be mapped to create a link between the systems. This criterion refers to the ability to do such mapping in an open system environment, so as to simplify the mapping process and to have fewer limitations in terms of different applications.

This criterion refers to part of the software functionality. The software will dynamically create "program language objects".

A repository is a central place where data is stored and maintained.

The ability to store data that lies outside the system

Messaging protocols are a description of data exchange protocols.

Other methods to do RPCs.

Sockets refers to an open port in a TCP / IP protocol.

Users can access some data elements but not all to protect data from being corrupted. The degree of locking is dependent on where in the hierarchy the data is being accessed. As an example is someone has opened a customer maintenance screen, certain fields will not be available to other people who may be enterring transactions that will require some of these data fields.

These are business statistics derived by batch processes (usually once a day).

Database tables that show data from separate files or tables in a single table

RPC refers to remote procedure calls. This allows a computer program to invoke a subroutine or procedure outside of its execution space (commonly on another computer on a shared network) without the programmer explicitly coding the details for this remote interaction.

This remote procedure call can take place at any time. The listener is always present.

This remote procedure call must take place at specific times when the listener is scheduled to be present.

OSF Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) is an industry-standard, vendor-neutral set of distributed computing technologies. DCE is deployed in critical business environments by a large number of enterprises worldwide.

Message oriented middleware is a client / server infrastructure that increases the interoperability, portability and flexibility of an application by allowing the application to be distributed over multiple heterogeneous platforms.

Microsoft MSMQ enables applications running at different times to communicate across heterogeneous networks and systems that may be temporarily off-line.

Refers to a type of mouse.

Gauges are measuring or testing instruments.

This refers to a source code interface that an operating system or library provides to support requests for services made by computer programs.

DDE is technology for communication among multiple applications under Microsoft Windows or OS / 2.

Legacy or another system must use an interface among other systems in order to communicate with each other.

Legacy or another system must use an interface among other systems in order to communicate with each other, this criterion should coincide with specific vendor systems, e.g., Oracle, SAP, etc.

This refers to how different types types of devices communicate with one another.

This criterion refers to a hardware / software protocol for establishing a physical infrared connection between the auxiliary interface and the standard device.

RS232 is a telecommunication interface. It is mainly used with a modem and a telephone line to send and receive faxes.

It is necessary to indicate the company name, address and other information within many types of enterprise systems. This information may include the format of the account codes, licenses, names of the users, their roles, etc.

The use of messages and reason codes that are commonly used across the industry

If business is done via the Internet, one of the requirements is to have a connection from the Internet to backend software.

The tools necessary to prepare a work center for the operations that will be performed there

This refers to resolving the different parts of a reference for information purposes.

The ability to find out on-line about all single-level parents in all bills-of-material that include a specific component

The ability to attach information that refers to data stored elsewhere

Areas whose access is limited to authorized personnel

The ability to use the SQL language to store information from form inputs, URL strings and the environment so that it is continually refreshed

This is one of the programming interfaces on the web site that would deliver business transactions to the backend software.

The ability to store data using the Data Encryption Standard (DES) cryptographic algorithm

The ability to store data using the international data encryption (IDEA) cryptographic algorithm

CORBA access means the system supports the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA). It is a common security standard for distributed applications (including Web-based or Web-accessible applications), but it differs from Web services type of security.

The ability to move data from one database to another database

The ability to transfer queries from one system user to another

PCT is an obsolete Internet security protocol

Security management is used for fraud elimination and protection from accidental errors.

Internet commerce protocols refers to how the web site communicates with its client.

A transaction begins with client identification and only succeeds when the client indicates that he wishes to complete the order. If the communication session is interrupted, the transaction is automatically cancelled.

Transport layer security (TLS) is a protocol layer used when transferring packets ie, TCP / IP model.

S / MIME is a standard used for encrypting public keys and signing of e-mail encapsulated in MIME.

UUEncode is used for encoding binary data for transmission over the UUCP mail system.

MIME is an Internet Standard that extends the format of e-mail to support text in character sets other than US-ASCII and non-text

This refers to how the network topology is built, such as how the computers are laid out, how they are connected, etc.

Application security refers to a layer of the TCP / IP model.

Multisite management is the ability to run and maintain more than one site.

ERP material demands from all sources must be able to consolidated into one source.

When fulfilling orders from warehouses, the warehouse that is deemed next in the priority list is used.

User interface refers to the manner in which people access and interact with the software. The user interface should facilitate the user's easy operation of the software

User configurability refers to how easily a user can make adjustments to the software without changing code.

The platform refers to the framework, both the hardware (e.g., type of processor) and the operating system that allows a computer or set of computers to function.

Basic types of support for reporting functionality.

Criteria for software as a service (SaaS) or hosted solutions.

Lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP)

The ability to categorize items based on whether their activity status is active or inactive

Software as a service (SaaS); a true multitenant application includes real time access to all the features and new releases three to four times per year. Moreover, there should be no software to install. To access new features, authorized users just sign on to the hosting system. One instance means every single customer gets the same attention, when it comes to requirements. Vendors don’t maintain multiple instances, which takes resources away from enhancing the product

SAS-70 is an auditing standard established by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA). Level II refers to the second level of reporting.

Application Service Provider (ASP)

Not only Internet Expolorer (IE)

Business Intelligence (BI)

SAS-70 is an auditing standard established by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA). Level II refers to the second level of reporting.

Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (AJAX) is used to create rich Internet applications. It combines asynchronous JavaScript and extensible markup language (XML).

Thereby eliminating any issues of version incompatibility, firewalls or firewall incompatibility

User interface (UI); scripting language can be based on Java, JavaScript, etc. For example, adminbistrators can capture complex engineering or sizing algorithms or complex pricing methods.

Examples of transport protocols include HTTP / S, FTP, SMTP / POP3, JMS, ODBC / JDBC, etc.

Deploys on-premise or delivered in a SaaS model with bi-directional migration, as customers require

Users can work off-line with the same look-and-feel of both on- and off-line application

Comment FactorID

195121

195122195123195125195126

195127

195128

195129195130

195131195132

195133

195134

195135

195136

195137

195138

MasterModelID

195139

195140

195141

195142

195143

195144

195145

195146

195147

195148

195149

195150

195151

195152

195153

195154195155

195156

195157

195158

195159195160

195161

195162

195163

195164

195165

195166195167

195168

195169

195170

195171

195172

195173195174

195175

195176

195177

195178

195179

195180

195181

195182195183

195184195185

195186

195187195188

195189195190195191195192

195193

195194

195195

195196195197

195198195199195200

195201

195202195203

195204195205

195206195207195208

195209

195210195211

195212195213

195214

195215195216195217

195218

195219

195220

195221

195222

195223

195224

195225

195226

195227195228

195229

195230

195231195232

195233

195234

195235

195236

195237195238

195239

195240195241

195242195243

195244

195245

195246

195247

195248

195249

195250

195251

195252195253

195254195255

195256195257195258

195259

195260195261

195262

195263

195264

195265

195266195267

195268195269195270195271195272195273195274

195275195276195277195278

195279

195280

195281195282195283195284195285

195286

195287

195288

195289

195290

195291

195292

195293195294

195295

195296195297

195298

195299

195300195301195302

195303

195304

195305

195306

195307

195308195309

195310195311

195312195313195314195315195316195317195318

195319195320195321

195322

195323

195324

195325

195326195327195328

195329

195330

195331

195332195333

195334195335

195336

195337

195338195339195340195341

195342195368195369195370195371195372195373195374

195375

195376

195377

195694195695195696195697195698195699195700195701

195702195703

195704195705195706195707

195708

195709195710

195711195712

195713

195714195715195716195717195718195719

195720

195721

195722195723195724195725195726195727

195728

195729195730

195731

195732195733

195734195735

195736

195737

195738

195739

195740195741195742195743195744195745195746

195747

195748195749195750

195751

195752195753195754

195755195756195757195758

195759195760195761

195762

195763

195764195765195766

195767

195768195769195770195771195772

195773195774195775

195776

195777

195779195780

195781

195782

195783195785

195786195787

195448195449195450

195451

195452195453

195454195455195456

195457195458195459195460195461195462195463195465195466195467195468195469195470195471

195472195473195474195475195476195477

195478195479195480195481195482

195483195484195485195486

195487195488195489

195490

195491

195492195493195494

195495195496195497

195498

195499195500

195501195502195503195504195505195506195507

195508195509195510

195511195512

195513

195514195515

195516

195517195519

195520

195521

195522

195523

195524

195525195526

195527

195528195529

195530

195531

195532

195533195534195535

195536

195537195538195539

195540

195541

195542195543195544195545195546195547

195548

195549

195550195551195552195553

195554

195555195556195557

195558195559195560

195561195562

195563

195564

195565

195566195567195568

195569195570195571195572

195573

195574195575195576195577195578

195579

195580

195581195582195583195584195585195586195587195588195589195590195591

195592195593

195594

195595

195596195597

195598

195599195600

195601

195602195603

195604

195605195606195607

195608195609195610195611195612

195613195614195615195616195617195618195619195620

195621195622195623

195624

195625

195626195627

195628195629

195630

195631195632

195633

195634

195635

195636195637195638195639

195640195641

195642

195643195644

195645

195646195647195648195649

195650

195651

195652

195653195654

195655195656195657195658195659

195660

195661195662195663

195664195665195666195667

195668

195669

195670195671195672195673

195674

195675195676195677195678195679195680195681

195683

195684195685195686

195687

195688

195689

195690195691195692

195693

195931195932

195933

195934

195935

195936

195937

195938

195939195940

195941

195942

195943

195944195945

195946

195947

195948195949

195950195951195952

195953

195954195955

195956195957

195958

195959195960195961

195962

195963

195964195965195966195967

195968195969

195970

195971

195972195973

195974195975

195976

195977195978

195979

195980

195981

195982

195983

195984

195985

195986

195987

195988

195989

195990

195991

195992195993

195994

195995

195996

195997

195998195999

196000

196001

196002

196003196004

196005196006

196007

196008

196009

196010476382476388476389476390476391476392476393476394476395476396476397476398476399476400

195843

13550651355066135506713550681355069135507013550711355072

195844

195845

195846

195847

195848195849

195850

195852

195853

1355073

1355074

1355075

1355076

195854

195855

195856195858195859

1355077

1355078

1355079

1355080

1355081

13550821355083

135508413550851355086

1355087

1355088

13550891355090

1355091

1355092

13550931355094

13550951355096

1355097

13550981355099135510013551011355102

13551031355104

1355105

1355106

196080

13554201355421135542213554231355424

1355425

1355426

1355427

1355428

1355429

1355430135543113554321355433

1355434

1355435

1355436135543713554381355439135544013554411355442

13554431355444135544513554461355447135544813554491355450135545113554521355453

135545413554551355456135545713554581355459135546013554611355462135546313554641355465135546613554671355468

1355469135547013554711355472135547313554741355475

13554761355477

1355478

1355479

1355480

1355481

1355482135548313554841355485

13554861355487135548813554891355490135549113554921355493196081196082196083

196084

196085

196086

196087

196088

196089

196090

196091

196092196093

196094

196095

196096

196097196098

196099196100

196101

196102

196103

196104

196105196106196107196108

196109196110

196111

196112

196113

196114

196115

196116

196117196118

196119

196120

196121196122196123

196124196125196126196127196128196129196130196131

196132

196133

196134

196135

196136

196137

195860195861

195862

195863

195864195865195866

195867

195868

195869195870195871

195872

195873195874195875195876195877

195878195879

195880

195881

195882

195883

195884195885195886195887195888195889

195890195891

195892195893195894

195895

195896

195897195898195899195900195901

195902195903

195904

195905

195906

195907

195908

195909

195910

195911

195912

195913

195914

195915

195916

195917

195918

195919

195920

195921

195922

195923

195924

195925195926195927195928

195929195930

196043196044

196045

196046

196047

196048

196049

196050196051

196052

196053

196054

196055

196056

196057

196058

196059

196060

196061

196062

196063

196064

196065

196066

196067

196068

196069

196070

196071

196072

196073196074

196075

196076

196077

196078

196079195378195379

195380195381

195382195383195384195385

195386

195387195388195389195390

195391195392

195393

195394

195395

195396

195397

195398

195399195400

195401195402195403

195404

195405195406195407195408195409195410195411

195412

195413195414195415

195416195417195418

195419

195420195421195422

195423195424195425195426195427195428195429195430195431195432195433

195434

195435195436

195437

195438

195439195440

195441

195442195443494367494293494311494312

494313494314

494315494316494318

494319

494320494321

494322

494323494324476065417698417699417700417701

417702

417703

417704

417705

417706

417707

417708

417709

417710

417711

417712

417713417714

417715417716

417717

417718

417719

417720

417721

417722417723

417724417725417726417727417728417729417730417731417732417733

417735417739

417740

417741

417742

417743

417744

417745

417746

417747

417748417757

417758417759417760417761417762417763

417764417765417766417767417768

417769

417770417771

417772

417773

417774417775

417776417777

417778

417779

417780

417781

417782417783

417784

417785

417786

417787

417788417789

417790

417791417792

417793

417794

417795

417796

417797

417798417799

417800

417801

417802

417803

417804

417805

417806

417807

417808

417809

417810

417811

417812417813417814

417815

417816

417817

417818

417819

417820

417821417822417823

417824

417825

417826

417827417828

417829

417830

417831417832417833417834417835417836417837417838417839417840

417841417842417843417844417845417846417847417848417849417850417851417852417853417854417891

417892

417893

417894

417895

417896417897417898417899417900417901

417902

417903417904

417905417906417907417908417909417910417911417912417913

417914

417915

417916417917417918417919417920417921

417922417923417924

417925

417926

417927417928

417929

417930

417931

417932

417933

417934

417935417936

417937

417938

417939417940

417941

417942

417943

417944417945

417946

417947

417948

417949417950417951417952

417953

417954

417955

417956

417957

417958417959417960417961417962417963

417964

417965

417966

417967

417968417969417970

417971417972417973417974417975417976417977417978417979

417980417981

417982

417983417984417985417986277289

277290

277291

277292

277293

277294

277295

277296

277297277298

277299

277300

277301

277302

277303

277304

277305

277306

277307

277308

277309277310

277311

277312

277313

277314

277315

277316

277317277318

277319

277320277321

277322277323

277324

277325

277326

277327277328277329

277330

277331

277332

277333

277334

277335

277336277337277338

277339

277340277341277342277343277344277345

277346277347277348277349277350475659475660475661475662475663475664475665475666475667475668475669475670475671475672475673475674475703475704475705475706475707475708475709475710475711

475712475713475714475715475716475717475718475719475720475721475723475724475725475726475727475728475729475730475733475734475737475738475739475740475741475742475743475744475745475746475747475748475749475750475751475752475753475754475755475756475757475758475759475760475761475762475763475764

475765475766475767475768475769475770475771475802475803475804475805475806475807475808475809475810475811475812475813475814475815475816475817475818475823475825475826475827475828475829475830475831475832475833475834475835475836475837475838475839475840475841475842475843475844475845475846475847

475849475851475852475853475949476083476084475857475858475859475860475861475862475863475864475865475867475868475869475870475871475872475873475874475875475877475878475879475880475881475882475883475884475885475886475901475902475903475904475905475907475909475910475911475912417321417322417323

417324417325

417326

417327

417328

417329

417330417331

417332

417333417334

417335417336417337

417338417339417340417341417342417343

417344417345

417346

417347

417348

417349

417350

417351

417352

417353

417354417482417483417485417486417487417488417489417490417491417493417494417495417496417497417498

417499

417500

417501

417502

417503

417504417505417510

417511

417512

417513

417514417515417516

417517417518

417519

417520417525

417526

417527417528

417529

417530417531417532417533417534417535

417536

417537

417538

417539417540

417541417542417543

417544417545

417546

417547417548

417549417550

417551

417552417553417554417556417557417558417559417560

417561417564

417565417566417567417568

417569417570

417571417572417573417574417575417576

417577417578

417579

417580

417581417582417583

417584417585417586

417587417588417589

417590

417591

417592

417593

417594417595417596

417597417598417599

417600

417601

417602417603417604417605

417606

417607

417608417609

417610417611

417612

417613

417614

417615

417616

417617

417618417619417620417621417622

417623417624417625417626

417627417628

417629417630417631417632417633

417634

417635

417636417637417638

417639

417640417641417642417643

417644417645417646

417647

417648417649417650417651

417652

417653417654417655417656417657417658

417659417660

417661417662

417663

417664417665

417666417667417668

417669

417670

417671417672417673417674417675

417676

417677417678

417679417680

417681

417682

417683

417684417685417688417689417690417691417692417693475913475914475915475916475917475918475919475920475921475922475923417749417750417751

417752

417753

417754417755417756419866419867

419868419869419870

419871419872419873

419874

419875

419876419877419878419879

419880

419881419882419883419884419885419886419887419888419889419891419892419893419894419895

197884

197885

197886197887

197888197889

197892

197893197894197895197896197897

1356119

1356120135612113561221356123

1356124197898197899

197900197901197902197903

197904

197905197906197907197911197912

197913

197914197916197917197918

197919197920

197921

197922197923197924197925

13561251356126

1356127

1356128

1356129

135613013561311356132135613313561341356135

1356136

1356137

1356138135613913561401356141197926197927

197928197929197930

197931

197933197934

197937

197938

197942197944197945197946197947197948

197949

197950

197951

197952

197953

197956197957

197959197960197961197963

197964

197965197966197967

197968197969197970

197971

197973

197974

197975197976197977

197978

197979197980

197981197983

1356142

197989197990

197991

197992

197993

197994

197995197996

197997

197998

197999198000198001198004

198005198006198007198008198009

198010

198011198016198017198018

198019

1980201356143

1356144

1356145

1356146135614713561481356149198021198023

198024

198025

198026198027

198028

198029

198030

198031

198032

198034198035

198036198037

198038198039

198040198041

198042

198043

198044

198045198046

1356150

13561511356152198047198048

198049198050

198051198052198053

198054

198055198056

198057198058

198059

198060

198061198062

198063

198064

198065

198066198067

198068

198069

198070198071198072

198073

198074198075

198076

198077

198078

198079

198080

198081198082

198083

198084

198085198086198087198088

1356153

1356154198091198092198093

1356155198094198095198096198097198098

198099

198100

198102

198103

198104

198105

198106

198109

198110198111198114198118198119198120

198121198122198123198124198125

198126

198127

198128

198130198131198132198133

198134

198135

198136

1981371356156

1356157

198138

198139

198140

198141

198142

198143198144

198145198146198147198148198149198150

198151

198154

198155

1981561356158476138476552

476553476556476557476558476559476560476561476562476563465425465426465427

465428

465429465430465431465432465433465434465435465436465437465438465439465440465441465442465443465444465445465446465447465448

465449465450465451465452465453465454465455465456465457465458465459

465460465461465462465463465464465465465466465467465468465469465470465471465472465473

465474465475465476465477465478465490

465491465493465494465495

465496

465497465498465499

465500

465501

465502465503465504

465505

465506

465507465508476622476623476624476625

476626

476627476628476629476630

476631476632476633476634476635476636476637476638476639

476640476641476642476643476644476645476646476647476648476649476655476656476657476658476659476660476661

476662476663476664

476665476666476667476668476669476670

476671476672

476673476674476675

476676476677476678476679476680476681476682476683476684465803476686476687465810465811465812465813465814465815465816465817

465818

465822465823465824465827465828465831476688476689476690

465835465837465861465862465864465868476691

465888465889465890476692465838

465839465840465841465842465843465844465845465846

465847465849465850465852465853

465854

465855465856465857

465863465865465866465867

465869465870

465871476693465876465877465878465879465880465881465882465883465884465885465886465891465892465893465895465896

465897

476694465805465807465808465809465825465826

465829476695476696

476697476698465899465900465901465902465903465904465905465906465907465908465909465910465911465912465913465914465915476719476720476721476722

476723476724476725476726476727

476728476729476730476731

476732476733476734476735476736

1023130

994921

994922

9949231023128994924

1023129

994925994926

994927994928994929994930

994931994934994932994933

1266179994940994943994941994942

1266180994949994950

1013247

994951

994952

994953

994954994955994956

994957994958

994959

994960

994961994962

994963994964

994965994966

994967994968

994969

994970

994971

994972

994973994974

994975

994976

994977

994978994979

994980994981

994982

995001

995002

995003995004995005995006995007

995008

995009

995010

995011

995012995013

995014995015

995016

9950171266185

1266184

995018995019995020995021

995022

995023995024

995025995026995027995028995029995030995031995032995033995034995035995036

995037

995038

995039995040995041995042995043995044995045995046995047995048995049

995050995051

1013250995052

995053995054

995055995056995057995058995059995060995061995062995063995064

995065995066

9950671013252101325310132541013255101325610132571013258101326010132611013262101326310132641013265101326610132671013268101326910132701013271101327210132731013274995068

995069995070995071

995072995073995074995075995076995077

198582

198583198584198585198586198587198588198589198590

198591

198592198593198594995091995092995093995094995095995096995097995098

995099995100995101995102

995103

995104995105995106995107995108

995109995110995111995112

995113995114995115995116995117995118995119

995120995121

995122

995123995124

995125995126995127995128

995129995130995131995132995133995134995135

995136

995137995138995139995140

995141995142

995143995144995145995146995147995148995149995150995151

995152995153995154995155995156995157995158995159995160995161995162995163

995164995165995166

995167995168995169

995170

995171

995172

995173995174995175995176

995177

995178995179

995180

995181

995182995183

995184995185995186995187995188995189995190995191995192

995194995195

995196995197995198995199995200995201

995202

995203

995204995205995206995207

995208995209

995210995211

995212

995213995214

1013277

995215995216995217995218995219995220

101327810132791013280101328110132821013283

10132841013285101328610132871013288101328910132901013291

10132921013293

995221995222995224995226995229995227995228995230995232995233995239995240995241995245995238995234995235995236995248995259995261995249

995258995253995254995255995256995293995546995547995548995549995550995551995552995553995554995555995556

995557

995558995559995560995561995562995563

995564

995565995566995567995568995569995570995571995572

995573995574995575995576995577995578

995579995580

995581

995582995583995584995586995587995588995589995590995591995592995593995594995595995596995597

995598995599995600995601995602995603995604995605995606995607995608995609995610995611995612995613995614995615995616995617995618995619

995620995621

995622995623995624

995625995626995627995628995629995630995631995632995633

995634995635995636995637995638995639

995640995641995642995643995644995645995646995647995648995649995650995651995652995653995654995655995656995657995658995659995660995661995662995663995664995665995666995667995668

995669

995670995671995672995673995674

995675

995676995677

995678

995679995680995681995682995683995684995685995686995687995688995689995690995691995692995693995694995695995696995697995698995699995700995701995702995703995704995705995706995707995708995709995710995711995712995713

995714995715995716995717995718995719995720995721995722995723995724995725995726995727995728995729

995730

995731995732995733

995734

995735995736995737995738995739995740995741995742995743995744995745995746995747995748995749

995750995751995752995753995754995755995756

995757995758995759995760995761995762995763995764995765995766995767995768995769995770995771995772995545995294995295995296

9952971013295101329614268691426870

142687114268721426873

14268741426875142687614268771426878

1426879

1426880

14268811426882

1426883

1426884

1426885

1426886

1426887

1426888

1426889

1426890

142689100

000

000000000000000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

00

0

0

0

00000000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

00

0

00

0000

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

000

0

0

0

00

00

000

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0000000

0

000

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

00

0

000

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

000

0000

00000

0000

000

0

00

0

0

00

0

0

00

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

000

0

00

0

0

0

000

0

00

0

0

0

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0000

0

00

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

00

00

00

00

00

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0000000000

0

0

0000000000

000

0

0

00

0

0000

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

000000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

000

0

000000

0

0

0

0

000

0

000000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

00

00

0

0000

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0000

0

0

0

00

00

0

00

000

0

00

0

000000

00

00

0000

0

0

0

0

0

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0000

0

0

0

00

0

0

000

0

0

0

00

0

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

00

0

00

00

0

0

0

0

0

00

0000000000000

0000

0

00

0

00

00

0

0

0000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

000

0

000

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0000

000

0

0

00000000

0

0

0000

0

0

0000000000000000000000

000000

00

0

0

0

000

0

000

0

00

00

00

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

00

00

000

0

0

0

0

00

00

0000000

0

00000

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0000000000000

00000

00000000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

00

0

00

00

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

00

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

00

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

00000

0

0

000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

00

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

0000

00000

0

0

00

0

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

00

00

000

00

0

00

0

000

00

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00000

00

0

0

Price Proposal Form Page 448 Printed: 04/08/2023

PRICE PROPOSAL

NOTICE TO PROPOSER: This Price Proposal MUST be completed EXACTLY as required.

PROPOSER NAME:

TITLE, SIGNATURE & DATE:

SOFTWARE AND SERVICESPRICE PROPOSAL SCHEDULE

Note that, in all cases, the Proposer shall perform / verify transcriptions manually; the spreadsheets may not automatically roll up the totals.

Description Proposed Price

Alternate A: Total Solution Price

Alternate B: Total Hardware Price

NOTE: The signatory must be an individual or a company officer empowered to contractually bind the Proposer. If the Signatory is not a Proposer company executive (president, vice-president, CEO), the Proposer SHALL attach evidence to this Price Proposal showing the Signatory’s

authority to bind the Proposer.

The costs under the Proposed Price column below shall indicate the proposed price for providing the software and services for functional areas of the system, including all services, for the total contract period. Prices in this section shall include the total application acquisition and/or development cost, including all software, installation and implementation costs for the duration of the contract.

Signing this document constitutes Full Disclosure of all Costs and confirms that all of the products and services have been included in this Price Proposal Form and associated Worksheets to meet or exceed City of Eden Prairie's goals and objectives.

The proposed price shall remain valid for at least 180 days subsequent to the date of the document Proposal opening and thereafter in accordance with any resulting contract between the Proposer and City of Eden Prairie. All monetary amounts are United States currency.

Throughout all schedules, the Proposer must enter an amount into each un-shaded Proposed Price cell. The Proposer may enter zero (0) in a required cell; however, the Proposer must not leave any required Proposed Price cell blank. For evaluation and contractual purposes, City of Eden Prairie shall interpret a blank Proposed Price cell as zero (0).

Schedule 1 - Software Page 449 Printed: 04/08/2023

Software Pricing Worksheet

Software Description Unit Price Extended Price Total

$0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0

Total Software Software Totals $0 $0 $0 $0 $0

Submitted by: Submission Date:

Version / Release

License Qty.

Initial Setup and Install

Annual License Fee

Licensing Basis (i.e. per user)

Total Software License & Install

Schedule 2 - Implementation Page 450 Printed: 04/08/2023

Implementation - Professional Services Pricing Worksheet

Implementation Service Description Service Rate Extended Pricing Annual Fee

Project Management $0 $0 n/aIntegration Development $0 $0 n/aApplication Configuration $0 $0 n/aApplication Customization $0 $0 n/aData Conversion $0 $0 n/aTesting $0 $0 n/aTraining $0 $0 n/aDocumentation $0 $0 n/aApplications Support $0 $0 $0 Applications Upgrades $0 $0 $0 Initial Software Setup and Install $0 $0 $0 Other (define) $0 $0 $0

$0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0

Total Services $0 $0

Submitted by: Submission Date: ** Details for Project Staffing must be provided in Schedule 5 - Staffing

Unit of Measure

Resource Count

Total Implementation

Schedule 3 - Hardware Page 451 Printed: 04/08/2023

Hardware Pricing Worksheet

Hardware Description Model / Type Qty. Unit Price Extended Price

$0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0

Site Preparation $0 etc. $0

Total Other

$ - $ - $ - $ -

Submitted by: Submission Date:

Initial Setup and Install

Annual Maintenance

Total Extended Price

Total Setup and Install

Total Annual Maintenance

Schedule 3 - Hardware Page 452 Printed: 04/08/2023

Hardware Pricing Worksheet

Submitted by: Submission Date:

Renewable Years

Schedule 4 - Options Page 453 Printed: 04/08/2023

Options Pricing Worksheet

Description Qty. Unit Price Extended Price

$0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0

$0 $0

Post Implementation Applications Support n/a n/a 1 Year $0 n/a n/a

$ -

Submitted by: Submission Date:

Version / Release

Initial Setup and Install

Annual Maintenance

Total Initial Setup and

Install

Total Annual Maintenance

Total Post Implementation Support

Schedule 5 - Staffing Page 454 Printed: 04/08/2023

Professional Services Staffing Resource and Rate Worksheet

Resource Title - Level Price

Perdiem $0 $0 Hotel Estimated $0 $0 Car rental $0 $0 Airfare Estimated $0 $0 Misc. $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0

$0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0

Travel and Lodging Expenses n/a n/a n/a $0

Total Staffing

$0

Submitted by: Submission Date: Note: Provide all Job Titles for all Levels of staff being assigned to the implementation.

Hourly / Daily Rate

Hours / Days Est. Project

Hours

Resource Count

Schedule 6 Summary Page 455 Printed: 04/08/2023

Pricing Summary

Price Category Start-Up 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 TotalSchedule 1: Total Software and License $0 Schedule 2: Total Imp. & Prof. Services $0 Schedule 3: Total - Hardware $0 Schedule 4: Total Options $0 Schedule 5: Staffing $0

Total $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0